src/misc1.c

/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
 *
 * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
 *
 * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
 */

/*
 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
 */

#include "vim.h"
#include "version.h"

static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));

/* All user names (for ~user completion as done by shell). */
#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
static garray_T	ga_users;
#endif

/*
 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
 */
    int
get_indent()
{
    return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
}

/*
 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
 */
    int
get_indent_lnum(lnum)
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
}

#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
 * "buf".
 */
    int
get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
    buf_T	*buf;
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
}
#endif

/*
 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
 */
    int
get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
    char_u	*ptr;
    int		ts;
{
    int		count = 0;

    for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
    {
	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
	    count += ts - (count % ts);
	else if (*ptr == ' ')
	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
	else
	    break;
    }
    return count;
}

/*
 * Set the indent of the current line.
 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
 * Caller must take care of undo.
 * "flags":
 *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
 *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
 *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
 */
    int
set_indent(size, flags)
    int		size;		    /* measured in spaces */
    int		flags;
{
    char_u	*p;
    char_u	*newline;
    char_u	*oldline;
    char_u	*s;
    int		todo;
    int		ind_len;	    /* measured in characters */
    int		line_len;
    int		doit = FALSE;
    int		ind_done = 0;	    /* measured in spaces */
    int		tab_pad;
    int		retval = FALSE;
    int		orig_char_len = -1; /* number of initial whitespace chars when
				       'et' and 'pi' are both set */

    /*
     * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
     * characters needed for the indent.
     */
    todo = size;
    ind_len = 0;
    p = oldline = ml_get_curline();

    /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
     * isn't already set */

    /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs; if both 'expandtab' and
     * 'preserveindent' are set count the number of characters at the
     * beginning of the line to be copied */
    if (!curbuf->b_p_et || (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi))
    {
	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
	{
	    ind_done = 0;

	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
	    {
		if (*p == TAB)
		{
		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
		    if (todo < tab_pad)
			break;
		    todo -= tab_pad;
		    ++ind_len;
		    ind_done += tab_pad;
		}
		else
		{
		    --todo;
		    ++ind_len;
		    ++ind_done;
		}
		++p;
	    }

	    /* Set initial number of whitespace chars to copy if we are
	     * preserving indent but expandtab is set */
	    if (curbuf->b_p_et)
		orig_char_len = ind_len;

	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
	    if (todo >= tab_pad && orig_char_len == -1)
	    {
		doit = TRUE;
		todo -= tab_pad;
		++ind_len;
		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
	    }
	}

	/* count tabs required for indent */
	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
	{
	    if (*p != TAB)
		doit = TRUE;
	    else
		++p;
	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
	    ++ind_len;
	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
	}
    }
    /* count spaces required for indent */
    while (todo > 0)
    {
	if (*p != ' ')
	    doit = TRUE;
	else
	    ++p;
	--todo;
	++ind_len;
	/* ++ind_done; */
    }

    /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
    if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
	return FALSE;

    /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
    if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
	p = oldline;
    else
	p = skipwhite(p);
    line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;

    /* If 'preserveindent' and 'expandtab' are both set keep the original
     * characters and allocate accordingly.  We will fill the rest with spaces
     * after the if (!curbuf->b_p_et) below. */
    if (orig_char_len != -1)
    {
	newline = alloc(orig_char_len + size - ind_done + line_len);
	if (newline == NULL)
	    return FALSE;
	todo = size - ind_done;
	ind_len = orig_char_len + todo;    /* Set total length of indent in
					    * characters, which may have been
					    * undercounted until now  */
	p = oldline;
	s = newline;
	while (orig_char_len > 0)
	{
	    *s++ = *p++;
	    orig_char_len--;
	}

	/* Skip over any additional white space (useful when newindent is less
	 * than old) */
	while (vim_iswhite(*p))
	    ++p;

    }
    else
    {
	todo = size;
	newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
	if (newline == NULL)
	    return FALSE;
	s = newline;
    }

    /* Put the characters in the new line. */
    /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
    if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
    {
	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
	{
	    p = oldline;
	    ind_done = 0;

	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
	    {
		if (*p == TAB)
		{
		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
		    if (todo < tab_pad)
			break;
		    todo -= tab_pad;
		    ind_done += tab_pad;
		}
		else
		{
		    --todo;
		    ++ind_done;
		}
		*s++ = *p++;
	    }

	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
	    {
		*s++ = TAB;
		todo -= tab_pad;
	    }

	    p = skipwhite(p);
	}

	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
	{
	    *s++ = TAB;
	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
	}
    }
    while (todo > 0)
    {
	*s++ = ' ';
	--todo;
    }
    mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);

    /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
    if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
    {
	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (colnr_T)(p - oldline);
	retval = TRUE;
    }
    else
	vim_free(newline);

    curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
    return retval;
}

/*
 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
 */
    static int
copy_indent(size, src)
    int		size;
    char_u	*src;
{
    char_u	*p = NULL;
    char_u	*line = NULL;
    char_u	*s;
    int		todo;
    int		ind_len;
    int		line_len = 0;
    int		tab_pad;
    int		ind_done;
    int		round;

    /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
     * Round 2: copy the characters. */
    for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
    {
	todo = size;
	ind_len = 0;
	ind_done = 0;
	s = src;

	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
	{
	    if (*s == TAB)
	    {
		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
		if (todo < tab_pad)
		    break;
		todo -= tab_pad;
		ind_done += tab_pad;
	    }
	    else
	    {
		--todo;
		++ind_done;
	    }
	    ++ind_len;
	    if (p != NULL)
		*p++ = *s;
	    ++s;
	}

	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
	if (todo >= tab_pad && !curbuf->b_p_et)
	{
	    todo -= tab_pad;
	    ++ind_len;
	    if (p != NULL)
		*p++ = TAB;
	}

	/* Add tabs required for indent */
	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts && !curbuf->b_p_et)
	{
	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
	    ++ind_len;
	    if (p != NULL)
		*p++ = TAB;
	}

	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
	while (todo > 0)
	{
	    --todo;
	    ++ind_len;
	    if (p != NULL)
		*p++ = ' ';
	}

	if (p == NULL)
	{
	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
	     * and the rest of the line. */
	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
	    if (line == NULL)
		return FALSE;
	    p = line;
	}
    }

    /* Append the original line */
    mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);

    /* Replace the line */
    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);

    /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
    curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
    return TRUE;
}

/*
 * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
 * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
 */
    int
get_number_indent(lnum)
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    colnr_T	col;
    pos_T	pos;

    regmatch_T	regmatch;
    int		lead_len = 0;	/* length of comment leader */

    if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
	return -1;
    pos.lnum = 0;

#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
    /* In format_lines() (i.e. not insert mode), fo+=q is needed too...  */
    if ((State & INSERT) || has_format_option(FO_Q_COMS))
	lead_len = get_leader_len(ml_get(lnum), NULL, FALSE, TRUE);
#endif
    regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
    if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
    {
	regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE;

	/* vim_regexec() expects a pointer to a line.  This lets us
	 * start matching for the flp beyond any comment leader...  */
	if (vim_regexec(&regmatch, ml_get(lnum) + lead_len, (colnr_T)0))
	{
	    pos.lnum = lnum;
	    pos.col = (colnr_T)(*regmatch.endp - ml_get(lnum));
#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
	    pos.coladd = 0;
#endif
	}
    }
    vim_free(regmatch.regprog);

    if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
	return -1;
    getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
    return (int)col;
}

#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)

static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));

/*
 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
 */
    static int
cin_is_cinword(line)
    char_u	*line;
{
    char_u	*cinw;
    char_u	*cinw_buf;
    int		cinw_len;
    int		retval = FALSE;
    int		len;

    cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
    cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
    if (cinw_buf != NULL)
    {
	line = skipwhite(line);
	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
	{
	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
	    {
		retval = TRUE;
		break;
	    }
	}
	vim_free(cinw_buf);
    }
    return retval;
}
#endif

/*
 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
 *
 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
 *
 * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
 * new line.
 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
 *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
 *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
 *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
 *	    OPENLINE_COM_LIST	format comments with list or 2nd line indent
 *
 * "second_line_indent": indent for after ^^D in Insert mode or if flag
 *			  OPENLINE_COM_LIST
 *
 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
 */
    int
open_line(dir, flags, second_line_indent)
    int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
    int		flags;
    int		second_line_indent;
{
    char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
    char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
    char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
    int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
    int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
    pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
    int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
    int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
    int		n;
    int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
    int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
    int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
    int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
    char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
    char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
#endif
    char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
    char_u	*p;
#endif
    int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
    pos_T	*pos;
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
    int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
# endif
			);
    int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
    int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
#endif
#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
    int		vreplace_mode;
#endif
    int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
    int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */

    /*
     * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
     */
    saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
    if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
	return FALSE;

#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
    if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
    {
	/*
	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
	 */
	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
	else
	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
	    goto theend;

	/*
	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
	 * etc) a bit later.
	 */
	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
	replace_push(NUL);
	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
	while (*p != NUL)
	{
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	    if (has_mbyte)
		p += replace_push_mb(p);
	    else
#endif
		replace_push(*p++);
	}
	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
    }
#endif

    if ((State & INSERT)
#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
#endif
	    )
    {
	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
	{
	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
	    first_char = *p;
	}
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
#endif
	saved_char = *p_extra;
	*p_extra = NUL;
    }

    u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
    did_si = FALSE;
#endif
    ai_col = 0;

    /*
     * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
     * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
     * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
     */
    if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
	trunc_line = TRUE;

    /*
     * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
     * indent to use for the new line.
     */
    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
			|| do_si
#endif
					    )
    {
	/*
	 * count white space on current line
	 */
	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
	if (newindent == 0 && !(flags & OPENLINE_COM_LIST))
	    newindent = second_line_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */

#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
	/*
	 * Do smart indenting.
	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
	 *	"if (condition) {"
	 */
	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
	{
	    char_u  *ptr;
	    char_u  last_char;

	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
	    ptr = saved_line;
# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE, TRUE);
	    else
		lead_len = 0;
# endif
	    if (dir == FORWARD)
	    {
		/*
		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
		 * recognised as comments.
		 */
		if (
# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
			lead_len == 0 &&
# endif
			ptr[0] == '#')
		{
		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
		    newindent = get_indent();
		}
# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE, TRUE);
		else
		    lead_len = 0;
		if (lead_len > 0)
		{
		    /*
		     * This case gets the following right:
		     *	    \*
		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
		     *	     *\
		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
		     *	    This should line up here;
		     */
		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
			p++;
		    if (p[0] == '*')
		    {
			for (p++; *p; p++)
			{
			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
			    {
				/*
				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
				 * with the line containing the start of
				 * the comment
				 */
				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
				{
				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
				    newindent = get_indent();
				}
			    }
			}
		    }
		}
		else	/* Not a comment line */
# endif
		{
		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
			--p;
		    last_char = *p;

		    /*
		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
		     */
		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
		    {
			if (p > ptr)
			    --p;
			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
			    --p;
		    }
		    /*
		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
		     * lines.  eg:
		     *	    if (condition &&
		     *			condition) {
		     *		Should line up here!
		     *	    }
		     */
		    if (*p == ')')
		    {
			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
			{
			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
			    newindent = get_indent();
			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
			}
		    }
		    /*
		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
		     * checking for "if" and the like.
		     */
		    if (last_char == '{')
		    {
			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
		    }
		    /*
		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
		     * '}'.
		     */
		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
			did_si = TRUE;
		}
	    }
	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
	    {
		/*
		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
		 * recognised as comments.
		 */
		if (
# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
			lead_len == 0 &&
# endif
			ptr[0] == '#')
		{
		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;

		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
		    {
			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
			else
			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
		    }
		    if (was_backslashed)
			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
		    else
			newindent = get_indent();
		}
		p = skipwhite(ptr);
		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
		    did_si = TRUE;
		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
		    can_si_back = TRUE;
	    }
	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
	}
	if (do_si)
	    can_si = TRUE;
#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */

	did_ai = TRUE;
    }

#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
    /*
     * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
     * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
     */
    end_comment_pending = NUL;
    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD, TRUE);
    else
	lead_len = 0;
    if (lead_len > 0)
    {
	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
	int	current_flag;
	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
	char_u	*p2;

	/*
	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
	 */
	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
	{
	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
	    {
		require_blank = TRUE;
		continue;
	    }
	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
	    {
		current_flag = *p;
		if (*p == COM_START)
		{
		    /*
		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
		     */
		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
		    {
			lead_len = 0;
			break;
		    }

		    /* find start of middle part */
		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
		    require_blank = FALSE;
		}

		/*
		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
		 */
		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
		{
		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
			require_blank = TRUE;
		    ++p;
		}
		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");

		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
		{
		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
		    ++p;
		}
		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");

		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];

		/*
		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
		 * the comment leader.
		 */
		if (dir == FORWARD)
		{
		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
			{
			    comment_end = p;
			    lead_len = 0;
			    break;
			}
		}

		/*
		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
		 */
		if (lead_len > 0)
		{
		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
		    {
			lead_repl = lead_middle;
			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
		    }

		    /*
		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
		     * comment leader on the next line.
		     */
		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
			    && ((p_extra != NULL
				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
				|| (p_extra == NULL
				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
				|| require_blank))
			extra_space = TRUE;
		}
		break;
	    }
	    if (*p == COM_END)
	    {
		/*
		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
		 * start (for C-comments).
		 */
		if (dir == FORWARD)
		{
		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
		    lead_len = 0;
		    break;
		}

		/*
		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
		 */
		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
		    --p;
		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
		    ;
		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);

		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
		 * the comment-end */
		extra_space = TRUE;

		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
		{
		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
		}
		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
		{
		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
			p2++;
		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
		}
		break;
	    }
	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
	    {
		/*
		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
		 */
		if (dir == BACKWARD)
		    lead_len = 0;
		else
		{
		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
		    lead_repl_len = 0;
		}
		break;
	    }
	}
	if (lead_len)
	{
	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_extra later) */
	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space + extra_len
		     + (second_line_indent > 0 ? second_line_indent : 0) + 1);
	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */

	    if (leader == NULL)
		lead_len = 0;
	    else
	    {
		vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);

		/*
		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
		 */
		if (lead_repl != NULL)
		{
		    int		c = 0;
		    int		off = 0;

		    for (p = lead_flags; *p != NUL && *p != ':'; )
		    {
			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
			    c = *p++;
			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
			    off = getdigits(&p);
			else
			    ++p;
		    }
		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
		    {
			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
			    ;
			++p;

#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
			 * screen characters, not bytes. */
			{
			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
							       lead_repl_len);
			    int	    old_size = 0;
			    char_u  *endp = p;
			    int	    l;

			    while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
			    {
				mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
				old_size += ptr2cells(p);
			    }
			    l = lead_repl_len - (int)(endp - p);
			    if (l != 0)
				mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
					(size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
			    lead_len += l;
			}
#else
			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
			    p = leader;
			else
			    p -= lead_repl_len;
#endif
			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;

			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
			while (--p >= leader)
			{
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
			    int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);

			    if (l > 1)
			    {
				p -= l;
				if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
				{
				    p[1] = ' ';
				    --l;
				}
				mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
				   (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
				lead_len -= l;
				*p = ' ';
			    }
			    else
#endif
			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
				*p = ' ';
			}
		    }
		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
		    {
			p = skipwhite(leader);
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
			 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
			 * not to be overwritten. */
			{
			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
							       lead_repl_len);
			    int	    i;
			    int	    l;

			    for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
			    {
				l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
				if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
				    break;
			    }
			    if (i != lead_repl_len)
			    {
				mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
				       (size_t)(lead_len - i - (p - leader)));
				lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
			    }
			}
#endif
			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);

			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
			 * remain the same. */
			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
			    {
				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
				{
				    --lead_len;
				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
				}
				else
				{
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
				    int	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);

				    if (l > 1)
				    {
					if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
					{
					    /* Replace a double-wide char with
					     * two spaces */
					    --l;
					    *p++ = ' ';
					}
					mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
					lead_len -= l - 1;
				    }
#endif
				    *p = ' ';
				}
			    }
			*p = NUL;
		    }

		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
					|| do_si
#endif
							   )
			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);

		    /* Add the indent offset */
		    if (newindent + off < 0)
		    {
			off = -newindent;
			newindent = 0;
		    }
		    else
			newindent += off;

		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
		     * alignment remains equal. */
		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
		    {
			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
			    break;
			--lead_len;
			--off;
		    }

		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
		     * extra space */
		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
			extra_space = FALSE;
		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
		}

		if (extra_space)
		{
		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
		}

		newcol = lead_len;

		/*
		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
		 * is in the comment leader
		 */
		if (newindent
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
				|| did_si
#endif
					   )
		{
		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
		    {
			--lead_len;
			--newcol;
			++leader;
		    }
		}

	    }
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
#endif
	}
	else if (comment_end != NULL)
	{
	    /*
	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
	     * comment.
	     */
	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
			(curbuf->b_p_ai
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
					|| do_si
#endif
							   ))
	    {
		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
		{
		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
		    newindent = get_indent();
		}
		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
	    }
	}
    }
#endif

    /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
    if (p_extra != NULL)
    {
	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */

	/*
	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
	 * non-blank.
	 *
	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
	 */
	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
	{
	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
		    && (!enc_utf8
			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
#endif
		    )
	    {
		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
		    replace_push(*p_extra);
		++p_extra;
		++less_cols_off;
	    }
	}
	if (*p_extra != NUL)
	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */

	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
    }

    if (p_extra == NULL)
	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */

#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
    /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
    if (lead_len)
    {
	if (flags & OPENLINE_COM_LIST && second_line_indent > 0)
	{
	    int i;
	    int padding = second_line_indent
					  - (newindent + (int)STRLEN(leader));

	    /* Here whitespace is inserted after the comment char.
	     * Below, set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT) will insert the
	     * whitespace needed before the comment char. */
	    for (i = 0; i < padding; i++)
	    {
		STRCAT(leader, " ");
		less_cols--;
		newcol++;
	    }
	}
	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
	p_extra = leader;
	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
	less_cols -= lead_len;
    }
    else
	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
#endif

    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
    if (dir == BACKWARD)
	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
    if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
#endif
    {
	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
								      == FAIL)
	    goto theend;
	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
	 * with markers. */
	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
	did_append = TRUE;
    }
#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
    else
    {
	/*
	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
	 */
	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
	{
	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
	     */
	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
	    vr_lines_changed++;
	}
	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
	did_append = FALSE;
    }
#endif

    if (newindent
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
		    || did_si
#endif
				)
    {
	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
	if (did_si)
	{
	    int        sw = (int)get_sw_value();

	    if (p_sr)
		newindent -= newindent % sw;
	    newindent += sw;
	}
#endif
	/* Copy the indent */
	if (curbuf->b_p_ci)
	{
	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);

	    /*
	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
	     */
	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
	}
	else
	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;

	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;

	/*
	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
	 */
	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
		replace_push(NUL);
	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
	if (no_si)
	    did_si = FALSE;
#endif
    }

#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
    /*
     * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
     * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
     */
    if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
	while (lead_len-- > 0)
	    replace_push(NUL);
#endif

    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;

    if (dir == FORWARD)
    {
	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
	{
	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
	    saved_line = NULL;
	    if (did_append)
	    {
		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
		did_append = FALSE;

		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
							1L, (long)-less_cols);
	    }
	    else
		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
	}

	/*
	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
	 */
	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
    }
    if (did_append)
	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);

    curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
#endif

#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
    /*
     * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
     * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
     * normal INSERT mode.
     */
    if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
    {
	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
	State = INSERT;
    }
    else
	vreplace_mode = 0;
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_LISP
    /*
     * May do lisp indenting.
     */
    if (!p_paste
# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
	    && leader == NULL
# endif
	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
    {
	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
	p = ml_get_curline();
	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
    }
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
    /*
     * May do indenting after opening a new line.
     */
    if (!p_paste
	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
#  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
#  endif
		)
	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
    {
	do_c_expr_indent();
	p = ml_get_curline();
	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
    }
#endif
#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
    if (vreplace_mode != 0)
	State = vreplace_mode;
#endif

#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
    /*
     * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
     * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
     * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
     */
    if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
    {
	/* Put new line in p_extra */
	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
	if (p_extra == NULL)
	    goto theend;

	/* Put back original line */
	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);

	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
#endif
	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
	vim_free(p_extra);
	next_line = NULL;
    }
#endif

    retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
theend:
    curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
    vim_free(saved_line);
    vim_free(next_line);
    vim_free(allocated);
    return retval;
}

#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
 * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
 * returned.
 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
 * comment leader.
 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
 * If "include_space" is set, include trailing whitespace while calculating the
 * length.
 */
    int
get_leader_len(line, flags, backward, include_space)
    char_u	*line;
    char_u	**flags;
    int		backward;
    int		include_space;
{
    int		i, j;
    int		result;
    int		got_com = FALSE;
    int		found_one;
    char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
    char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
    char_u	*list;
    int		middle_match_len = 0;
    char_u	*prev_list;
    char_u	*saved_flags = NULL;

    result = i = 0;
    while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
	++i;

    /*
     * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
     */
    while (line[i] != NUL)
    {
	/*
	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
	 */
	found_one = FALSE;
	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
	{
	    /* Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance "list" to next
	     * one.  Put "string" at start of string.  */
	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)
		*flags = list;	    /* remember where flags started */
	    prev_list = list;
	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
		continue;
	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */

	    /* If we found a middle match previously, use that match when this
	     * is not a middle or end. */
	    if (middle_match_len != 0
		    && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_MIDDLE) == NULL
		    && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_END) == NULL)
		break;

	    /* When we already found a nested comment, only accept further
	     * nested comments. */
	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
		continue;

	    /* When 'O' flag present and using "O" command skip this one. */
	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
		continue;

	    /* Line contents and string must match.
	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
	     * TABs and spaces). */
	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
	    {
		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
		    continue;  /* missing shite space */
		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
		    ++string;
	    }
	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
		;
	    if (string[j] != NUL)
		continue;  /* string doesn't match */

	    /* When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
	     * end-of-line after the string in the line. */
	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
		continue;

	    /* We have found a match, stop searching unless this is a middle
	     * comment. The middle comment can be a substring of the end
	     * comment in which case it's better to return the length of the
	     * end comment and its flags.  Thus we keep searching with middle
	     * and end matches and use an end match if it matches better. */
	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_MIDDLE) != NULL)
	    {
		if (middle_match_len == 0)
		{
		    middle_match_len = j;
		    saved_flags = prev_list;
		}
		continue;
	    }
	    if (middle_match_len != 0 && j > middle_match_len)
		/* Use this match instead of the middle match, since it's a
		 * longer thus better match. */
		middle_match_len = 0;

	    if (middle_match_len == 0)
		i += j;
	    found_one = TRUE;
	    break;
	}

	if (middle_match_len != 0)
	{
	    /* Use the previously found middle match after failing to find a
	     * match with an end. */
	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)
		*flags = saved_flags;
	    i += middle_match_len;
	    found_one = TRUE;
	}

	/* No match found, stop scanning. */
	if (!found_one)
	    break;

	result = i;

	/* Include any trailing white space. */
	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
	    ++i;

	if (include_space)
	    result = i;

	/* If this comment doesn't nest, stop here. */
	got_com = TRUE;
	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
	    break;
    }
    return result;
}

/*
 * Return the offset at which the last comment in line starts. If there is no
 * comment in the whole line, -1 is returned.
 *
 * When "flags" is not null, it is set to point to the flags describing the
 * recognized comment leader.
 */
    int
get_last_leader_offset(line, flags)
    char_u	*line;
    char_u	**flags;
{
    int		result = -1;
    int		i, j;
    int		lower_check_bound = 0;
    char_u	*string;
    char_u	*com_leader;
    char_u	*com_flags;
    char_u	*list;
    int		found_one;
    char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */

    /*
     * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
     */
    i = (int)STRLEN(line);
    while (--i >= lower_check_bound)
    {
	/*
	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
	 */
	found_one = FALSE;
	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
	{
	    char_u *flags_save = list;

	    /*
	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
	     * put string at start of string.
	     */
	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
	    if (string == NULL)	/* If everything is fine, this cannot actually
				 * happen. */
	    {
		continue;
	    }
	    *string++ = NUL;	/* Isolate flags from string. */
	    com_leader = string;

	    /*
	     * Line contents and string must match.
	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
	     * TABs and spaces).
	     */
	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
	    {
		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
		    continue;
		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
		    ++string;
	    }
	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
		/* do nothing */;
	    if (string[j] != NUL)
		continue;

	    /*
	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
	     */
	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
		    && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
	    {
		continue;
	    }

	    /*
	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
	     */
	    found_one = TRUE;

	    if (flags)
		*flags = flags_save;
	    com_flags = flags_save;

	    break;
	}

	if (found_one)
	{
	    char_u  part_buf2[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
	    int     len1, len2, off;

	    result = i;
	    /*
	     * If this comment nests, continue searching.
	     */
	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) != NULL)
		continue;

	    lower_check_bound = i;

	    /* Let's verify whether the comment leader found is a substring
	     * of other comment leaders. If it is, let's adjust the
	     * lower_check_bound so that we make sure that we have determined
	     * the comment leader correctly.
	     */

	    while (vim_iswhite(*com_leader))
		++com_leader;
	    len1 = (int)STRLEN(com_leader);

	    for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
	    {
		char_u *flags_save = list;

		(void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf2, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
		if (flags_save == com_flags)
		    continue;
		string = vim_strchr(part_buf2, ':');
		++string;
		while (vim_iswhite(*string))
		    ++string;
		len2 = (int)STRLEN(string);
		if (len2 == 0)
		    continue;

		/* Now we have to verify whether string ends with a substring
		 * beginning the com_leader. */
		for (off = (len2 > i ? i : len2); off > 0 && off + len1 > len2;)
		{
		    --off;
		    if (!STRNCMP(string + off, com_leader, len2 - off))
		    {
			if (i - off < lower_check_bound)
			    lower_check_bound = i - off;
		    }
		}
	    }
	}
    }
    return result;
}
#endif

/*
 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
 */
    int
plines(lnum)
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
}

    int
plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
    win_T	*wp;
    linenr_T	lnum;
    int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
{
#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
    /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
     * is one line anyway. */
    return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
}

    int
plines_nofill(lnum)
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
}

    int
plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
    win_T	*wp;
    linenr_T	lnum;
    int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
{
#endif
    int		lines;

    if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
	return 1;

#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
    if (wp->w_width == 0)
	return 1;
#endif

#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
    /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
    /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
    if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
	return 1;
#endif

    lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
    if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
	return (int)wp->w_height;
    return lines;
}

/*
 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
 * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
 */
    int
plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
    win_T	*wp;
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    char_u	*s;
    long	col;
    int		width;

    s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
    if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
	return 1;
    col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);

    /*
     * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
     * extra column.
     */
    if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
	col += 1;

    /*
     * Add column offset for 'number', 'relativenumber' and 'foldcolumn'.
     */
    width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
    if (width <= 0)
	return 32000;
    if (col <= width)
	return 1;
    col -= width;
    width += win_col_off2(wp);
    return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
}

/*
 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
 */
    int
plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
    win_T	*wp;
    linenr_T	lnum;
    long	column;
{
    long	col;
    char_u	*s;
    int		lines = 0;
    int		width;

#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
    /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
     * is one line anyway. */
    lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
#endif

    if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
	return lines + 1;

#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
    if (wp->w_width == 0)
	return lines + 1;
#endif

    s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);

    col = 0;
    while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
    {
	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
	mb_ptr_adv(s);
    }

    /*
     * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
     * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
     * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
     * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
     * 'ts') -- webb.
     */
    if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;

    /*
     * Add column offset for 'number', 'relativenumber', 'foldcolumn', etc.
     */
    width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
    if (width <= 0)
	return 9999;

    lines += 1;
    if (col > width)
	lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)) + 1;
    return lines;
}

    int
plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
    win_T	*wp;
    linenr_T	first, last;
{
    int		count = 0;

    while (first <= last)
    {
#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
	int	x;

	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
	 * that are maybe folded. */
	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
	if (x > 0)
	{
	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
	    first += x;
	}
	else
#endif
	{
#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
	    else
#endif
		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
	    ++first;
	}
    }
    return (count);
}

#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
 */
    void
ins_bytes(p)
    char_u	*p;
{
    ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
}
#endif

#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
 */
    void
ins_bytes_len(p, len)
    char_u	*p;
    int		len;
{
    int		i;
# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    int		n;

    if (has_mbyte)
	for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
	{
	    if (enc_utf8)
		/* avoid reading past p[len] */
		n = utfc_ptr2len_len(p + i, len - i);
	    else
		n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
	    ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
	}
    else
# endif
	for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
	    ins_char(p[i]);
}
#endif

/*
 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
 * convert bytes to a character.
 */
    void
ins_char(c)
    int		c;
{
#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
    char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES + 1];
    int		n;

    n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);

    /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
     * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
    if (buf[0] == 0)
	buf[0] = '\n';

    ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
}

    void
ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
    char_u	*buf;
    int		charlen;
{
    int		c = buf[0];
#endif
    int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
    int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
    char_u	*p;
    char_u	*newp;
    char_u	*oldp;
    int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
    colnr_T	col;
    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
    int		i;

#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
    /* Break tabs if needed. */
    if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
	coladvance_force(getviscol());
#endif

    col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
    oldp = ml_get(lnum);
    linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;

    /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
    oldlen = 0;
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    newlen = charlen;
#else
    newlen = 1;
#endif

    if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
    {
#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
	{
	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
	    colnr_T	vcol;
	    int		old_list;
#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
	    char_u	buf[2];
#endif

	    /*
	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
	     */
	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;

	    /*
	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
	     */
	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
	    buf[0] = c;
	    buf[1] = NUL;
#endif
	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
	    {
		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
		 * position. */
		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
		    break;
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen);
#else
		++oldlen;
#endif
		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
		if (vcol > new_vcol)
		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
	    }
	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
	}
	else
#endif
	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
	{
	    /* normal replace */
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col);
#else
	    oldlen = 1;
#endif
	}


	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
	replace_push(NUL);
	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
	{
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	    if (has_mbyte)
		i += replace_push_mb(oldp + col + i) - 1;
	    else
#endif
		replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
	}
    }

    newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
    if (newp == NULL)
	return;

    /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
    if (col > 0)
	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);

    /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
    p = newp + col;
    mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));

    /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
    i = charlen;
#else
    *p = c;
    i = 1;
#endif

    /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
    while (i < newlen)
	p[i++] = ' ';

    /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
    ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);

    /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
    changed_bytes(lnum, col);

    /*
     * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
     * show the match for right parens and braces.
     */
    if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
	    && msg_silent == 0
#ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND
	    && !ins_compl_active()
#endif
       )
    {
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	if (has_mbyte)
	    showmatch(mb_ptr2char(buf));
	else
#endif
	    showmatch(c);
    }

#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
    if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
#endif
    {
	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
#else
	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
#endif
    }
    /*
     * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
     */
}

/*
 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
 */
    void
ins_str(s)
    char_u	*s;
{
    char_u	*oldp, *newp;
    int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
    int		oldlen;
    colnr_T	col;
    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;

#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
    if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
	coladvance_force(getviscol());
#endif

    col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
    oldp = ml_get(lnum);
    oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);

    newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
    if (newp == NULL)
	return;
    if (col > 0)
	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
    mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
    mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
    ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
    changed_bytes(lnum, col);
    curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
}

/*
 * Delete one character under the cursor.
 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
 *
 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
 */
    int
del_char(fixpos)
    int		fixpos;
{
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    if (has_mbyte)
    {
	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
	mb_adjust_cursor();
	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
	    return FAIL;
	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
    }
#endif
    return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE);
}

#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
 */
    int
del_chars(count, fixpos)
    long	count;
    int		fixpos;
{
    long	bytes = 0;
    long	i;
    char_u	*p;
    int		l;

    p = ml_get_cursor();
    for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
    {
	l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
	bytes += l;
	p += l;
    }
    return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE);
}
#endif

/*
 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
 *
 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
 */
    int
del_bytes(count, fixpos_arg, use_delcombine)
    long	count;
    int		fixpos_arg;
    int		use_delcombine UNUSED;	    /* 'delcombine' option applies */
{
    char_u	*oldp, *newp;
    colnr_T	oldlen;
    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
    colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
    int		was_alloced;
    long	movelen;
    int		fixpos = fixpos_arg;

    oldp = ml_get(lnum);
    oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);

    /*
     * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
     */
    if (col >= oldlen)
	return FAIL;

#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
     * delete the last combining character. */
    if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8
					 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count)
    {
	int	cc[MAX_MCO];
	int	n;

	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, cc);
	if (cc[0] != NUL)
	{
	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
	    n = col;
	    do
	    {
		col = n;
		count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n);
		n += count;
	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
	    fixpos = 0;
	}
    }
#endif

    /*
     * When count is too big, reduce it.
     */
    movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
    if (movelen <= 1)
    {
	/*
	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL,
	 * unless "restart_edit" is set or 'virtualedit' contains "onemore".
	 */
	if (col > 0 && fixpos && restart_edit == 0
#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
					      && (ve_flags & VE_ONEMORE) == 0
#endif
					      )
	{
	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	    if (has_mbyte)
		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
#endif
	}
	count = oldlen - col;
	movelen = 1;
    }

    /*
     * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
     * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
     * Can't do this when using Netbeans, because we would need to invoke
     * netbeans_removed(), which deallocates the line.  Let ml_replace() take
     * care of notifying Netbeans.
     */
#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
    if (netbeans_active())
	was_alloced = FALSE;
    else
#endif
	was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();    /* check if oldp was allocated */
    if (was_alloced)
	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
    else
    {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
	if (newp == NULL)
	    return FAIL;
	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
    }
    mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
    if (!was_alloced)
	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);

    /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
    changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);

    return OK;
}

/*
 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
 *
 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
 */
    int
truncate_line(fixpos)
    int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
{
    char_u	*newp;
    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
    colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;

    if (col == 0)
	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
    else
	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);

    if (newp == NULL)
	return FAIL;

    ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);

    /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
    changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);

    /*
     * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
     */
    if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
	--curwin->w_cursor.col;

    return OK;
}

/*
 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
 */
    void
del_lines(nlines, undo)
    long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
    int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
{
    long	n;
    linenr_T	first = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;

    if (nlines <= 0)
	return;

    /* save the deleted lines for undo */
    if (undo && u_savedel(first, nlines) == FAIL)
	return;

    for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
    {
	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
	    break;

	ml_delete(first, TRUE);
	++n;

	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
	if (first > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
	    break;
    }

    /* Correct the cursor position before calling deleted_lines_mark(), it may
     * trigger a callback to display the cursor. */
    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
    check_cursor_lnum();

    /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
    deleted_lines_mark(first, n);
}

    int
gchar_pos(pos)
    pos_T *pos;
{
    char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);

#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    if (has_mbyte)
	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
#endif
    return (int)*ptr;
}

    int
gchar_cursor()
{
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    if (has_mbyte)
	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
#endif
    return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
}

/*
 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
 * It is directly written into the block.
 */
    void
pchar_cursor(c)
    int c;
{
    *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
}

/*
 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
 *		    non-blank in the line.
 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
 *		    the line.
 */
    int
inindent(extra)
    int	    extra;
{
    char_u	*ptr;
    colnr_T	col;

    for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
	++ptr;
    if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
	return TRUE;
    else
	return FALSE;
}

/*
 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
 */
    char_u *
skip_to_option_part(p)
    char_u  *p;
{
    if (*p == ',')
	++p;
    while (*p == ' ')
	++p;
    return p;
}

/*
 * Call this function when something in the current buffer is changed.
 *
 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
 *
 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
 */
    void
changed()
{
#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
    /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
     * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
     * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
    if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
	return;
    xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
#endif

    if (!curbuf->b_changed)
    {
	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;

	/* Give a warning about changing a read-only file.  This may also
	 * check-out the file, thus change "curbuf"! */
	change_warning(0);

	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
#endif
		)
	{
	    ml_open_file(curbuf);

	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
	    {
		out_flush();
		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
		wait_return(TRUE);
		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
	    }
	}
	changed_int();
    }
    ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
}

/*
 * Internal part of changed(), no user interaction.
 */
    void
changed_int()
{
    curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
    ml_setflags(curbuf);
#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
    check_status(curbuf);
    redraw_tabline = TRUE;
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
    need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
#endif
}

static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));

/*
 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
 * - invalidates cached values
 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
 */
    void
changed_bytes(lnum, col)
    linenr_T	lnum;
    colnr_T	col;
{
    changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
    changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);

#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
    /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
    if (curwin->w_p_diff)
    {
	win_T	    *wp;
	linenr_T    wlnum;

	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
	    {
		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
		if (wlnum > 0)
		    changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
	    }
    }
#endif
}

    static void
changedOneline(buf, lnum)
    buf_T	*buf;
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    if (buf->b_mod_set)
    {
	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
	else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
    }
    else
    {
	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
	buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
	buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
    }
}

/*
 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
 */
    void
appended_lines(lnum, count)
    linenr_T	lnum;
    long	count;
{
    changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
}

/*
 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
 */
    void
appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
    linenr_T	lnum;
    long	count;
{
    mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
    changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
}

/*
 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
 */
    void
deleted_lines(lnum, count)
    linenr_T	lnum;
    long	count;
{
    changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
}

/*
 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
 * Make sure the cursor is on a valid line before calling, a GUI callback may
 * be triggered to display the cursor.
 */
    void
deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
    linenr_T	lnum;
    long	count;
{
    mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
    changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
}

/*
 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
 * - invalidate cached values
 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
 */
    void
changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
    linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
    colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
    linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
    long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
{
    changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);

#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
    if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
    {
	/* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
	 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
	 * displaying. */
	win_T	    *wp;
	linenr_T    wlnum;

	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
	    {
		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
		if (wlnum > 0)
		    changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
						    lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
	    }
    }
#endif

    changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
}

    static void
changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
    buf_T	*buf;
    linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
    linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
    long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
{
    if (buf->b_mod_set)
    {
	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
	{
	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
	    buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
	    if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
		buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
	}
	if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
	buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
    }
    else
    {
	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
	buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
	buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
    }
}

/*
 * Common code for when a change is was made.
 * See changed_lines() for the arguments.
 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
 */
    static void
changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
    linenr_T	lnum;
    colnr_T	col;
    linenr_T	lnume;
    long	xtra;
{
    win_T	*wp;
#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
    tabpage_T	*tp;
#endif
    int		i;
#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
    int		cols;
    pos_T	*p;
    int		add;
#endif

    /* mark the buffer as modified */
    changed();

    /* set the '. mark */
    if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
    {
	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;

#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
	 * don't have an entry yet. */
	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
	{
	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
		add = TRUE;
	    else
	    {
		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
		if (p->lnum != lnum)
		    add = TRUE;
		else
		{
		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
		    if (cols == 0)
			cols = 79;
		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
		}
	    }
	    if (add)
	    {
		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
		 * position in the changelist. */
		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;

		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
		{
		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
		    FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
		    {
			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
			 * this buffer. */
			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
		    }
		}
		FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
		{
		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
			++wp->w_changelistidx;
		}
		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
	    }
	}
	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
							curbuf->b_last_change;
	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
	 * takes you back to it. */
	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
#endif
    }

    FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
    {
	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
	{
	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;

	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
	     * values for the cursor. */
#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
	    /*
	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
	     */
	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);

	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
	     * might be displayed differently.
	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
		wp->w_cline_folded = i;

	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
	    {
		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
	    }
#endif

	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
	    {
		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
		approximate_botline_win(wp);
	    }

	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
	     * after the change. */
	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
		{
		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
		    {
			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
			{
			    /* line included in change */
			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
			}
			else if (xtra != 0)
			{
			    /* line below change */
			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
#endif
			}
		    }
#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
		    {
			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
			 * may need to be redrawn */
			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
		    }
#endif
		}

#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
	    /* Take care of side effects for setting w_topline when folds have
	     * changed.  Esp. when the buffer was changed in another window. */
	    if (hasAnyFolding(wp))
		set_topline(wp, wp->w_topline);
#endif
	}
    }

    /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
     * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
    if (must_redraw < VALID)
	must_redraw = VALID;

#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
    /* when the cursor line is changed always trigger CursorMoved */
    if (lnum <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum
		 && lnume + (xtra < 0 ? -xtra : xtra) > curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
	last_cursormoved.lnum = 0;
#endif
}

/*
 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
 */
    void
unchanged(buf, ff)
    buf_T	*buf;
    int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
{
    if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf, FALSE)))
    {
	buf->b_changed = 0;
	ml_setflags(buf);
	if (ff)
	    save_file_ff(buf);
#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
	check_status(buf);
	redraw_tabline = TRUE;
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
#endif
    }
    ++buf->b_changedtick;
#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
    netbeans_unmodified(buf);
#endif
}

#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
 *		 need to be updated
 */
    void
check_status(buf)
    buf_T	*buf;
{
    win_T	*wp;

    for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
	{
	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
		must_redraw = VALID;
	}
}
#endif

/*
 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
 * Don't do this for autocommands.
 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn"
 * will be TRUE.
 * Careful: may trigger autocommands that reload the buffer.
 */
    void
change_warning(col)
    int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
{
    static char *w_readonly = N_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file");

    if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
	    && !autocmd_busy
#endif
	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
    {
#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
	++curbuf_lock;
	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
	--curbuf_lock;
	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
	    return;
#endif
	/*
	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
	 * be after the mode message.
	 */
	msg_start();
	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
	    msg_col = col;
	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_(w_readonly), hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
	set_vim_var_string(VV_WARNINGMSG, (char_u *)_(w_readonly), -1);
#endif
	msg_clr_eos();
	(void)msg_end();
	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
	{
	    out_flush();
	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
	}
	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
	    showmode();
    }
}

/*
 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
 *
 * return the 'y' or 'n'
 */
    int
ask_yesno(str, direct)
    char_u  *str;
    int	    direct;
{
    int	    r = ' ';
    int	    save_State = State;

    if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
    ++no_wait_return;
#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
    dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
#endif
    State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
    setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
#endif
    ++no_mapping;
    ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */

    while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
    {
	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
	if (direct)
	    r = get_keystroke();
	else
	    r = plain_vgetc();
	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
	    r = 'n';
	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
	out_flush();
    }
    --no_wait_return;
    State = save_State;
#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
    setmouse();
#endif
    --no_mapping;
    --allow_keys;

    return r;
}

#if defined(FEAT_MOUSE) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Return TRUE if "c" is a mouse key.
 */
    int
is_mouse_key(c)
    int c;
{
    return c == K_LEFTMOUSE
	|| c == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
	|| c == K_LEFTDRAG
	|| c == K_LEFTRELEASE
	|| c == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
	|| c == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
	|| c == K_MIDDLEDRAG
	|| c == K_MIDDLERELEASE
	|| c == K_RIGHTMOUSE
	|| c == K_RIGHTDRAG
	|| c == K_RIGHTRELEASE
	|| c == K_MOUSEDOWN
	|| c == K_MOUSEUP
	|| c == K_MOUSELEFT
	|| c == K_MOUSERIGHT
	|| c == K_X1MOUSE
	|| c == K_X1DRAG
	|| c == K_X1RELEASE
	|| c == K_X2MOUSE
	|| c == K_X2DRAG
	|| c == K_X2RELEASE;
}
#endif

/*
 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
 * button (used at the more prompt).
 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
 */
    int
get_keystroke()
{
    char_u	*buf = NULL;
    int		buflen = 150;
    int		maxlen;
    int		len = 0;
    int		n;
    int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
    int		waited = 0;

    mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
    for (;;)
    {
	cursor_on();
	out_flush();

	/* Leave some room for check_termcode() to insert a key code into (max
	 * 5 chars plus NUL).  And fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of
	 * bytes. */
	maxlen = (buflen - 6 - len) / 3;
	if (buf == NULL)
	    buf = alloc(buflen);
	else if (maxlen < 10)
	{
	    /* Need some more space. This might happen when receiving a long
	     * escape sequence. */
	    buflen += 100;
	    buf = vim_realloc(buf, buflen);
	    maxlen = (buflen - 6 - len) / 3;
	}
	if (buf == NULL)
	{
	    do_outofmem_msg((long_u)buflen);
	    return ESC;  /* panic! */
	}

	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
	 * terminal code to complete. */
	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, maxlen, len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
	if (n > 0)
	{
	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
	    len += n;
	    waited = 0;
	}
	else if (len > 0)
	    ++waited;	    /* keep track of the waiting time */

	/* Incomplete termcode and not timed out yet: get more characters */
	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, buflen, &len)) < 0
	       && (!p_ttimeout || waited * 100L < (p_ttm < 0 ? p_tm : p_ttm)))
	    continue;

	if (n == KEYLEN_REMOVED)  /* key code removed */
	{
	    if (must_redraw != 0 && !need_wait_return && (State & CMDLINE) == 0)
	    {
		/* Redrawing was postponed, do it now. */
		update_screen(0);
		setcursor(); /* put cursor back where it belongs */
	    }
	    continue;
	}
	if (n > 0)		/* found a termcode: adjust length */
	    len = n;
	if (len == 0)		/* nothing typed yet */
	    continue;

	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
	n = buf[0];
	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
	{
	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
		    || n == K_IGNORE
#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
		    || (is_mouse_key(n) && n != K_LEFTMOUSE)
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_GUI
		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
#endif
	       )
	    {
		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
		    mod_mask = buf[2];
		len -= 3;
		if (len > 0)
		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
		continue;
	    }
	    break;
	}
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	if (has_mbyte)
	{
	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
	    buf[len >= buflen ? buflen - 1 : len] = NUL;
	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
	}
#endif
#ifdef UNIX
	if (n == intr_char)
	    n = ESC;
#endif
	break;
    }
    vim_free(buf);

    mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
    return n;
}

/*
 * Get a number from the user.
 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
 */
    int
get_number(colon, mouse_used)
    int	    colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
    int	    *mouse_used;
{
    int	n = 0;
    int	c;
    int typed = 0;

    if (mouse_used != NULL)
	*mouse_used = FALSE;

    /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
     * zero (as if CR was hit). */
    if (msg_silent != 0)
	return 0;

#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
    dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
#endif
    ++no_mapping;
    ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
    for (;;)
    {
	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
	c = safe_vgetc();
	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
	{
	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
	    msg_putchar(c);
	    ++typed;
	}
	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
	{
	    if (typed > 0)
	    {
		MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
		--typed;
	    }
	    n /= 10;
	}
#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
	else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
	{
	    *mouse_used = TRUE;
	    n = mouse_row + 1;
	    break;
	}
#endif
	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
	{
	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
	    if (!exmode_active)
		cmdline_row = msg_row;
	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
	    do_redraw = FALSE;
	    break;
	}
	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
	    break;
    }
    --no_mapping;
    --allow_keys;
    return n;
}

/*
 * Ask the user to enter a number.
 * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
 * the line number.
 */
    int
prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
    int		*mouse_used;
{
    int		i;
    int		save_cmdline_row;
    int		save_State;

    /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
    if (mouse_used != NULL)
	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number and <Enter> or click with mouse (empty cancels): "));
    else
	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number and <Enter> (empty cancels): "));

    /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted and we still
     * get mouse events. */
    save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
    cmdline_row = 0;
    save_State = State;
    State = CMDLINE;

    i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
    if (KeyTyped)
    {
	/* don't call wait_return() now */
	/* msg_putchar('\n'); */
	cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
	need_wait_return = FALSE;
	msg_didany = FALSE;
	msg_didout = FALSE;
    }
    else
	cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
    State = save_State;

    return i;
}

    void
msgmore(n)
    long n;
{
    long pn;

    if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
	return;

    /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
     * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
     * then "put" reports the last action. */
    if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
	return;

    if (n > 0)
	pn = n;
    else
	pn = -n;

    if (pn > p_report)
    {
	if (pn == 1)
	{
	    if (n > 0)
		vim_strncpy(msg_buf, (char_u *)_("1 more line"),
							     MSG_BUF_LEN - 1);
	    else
		vim_strncpy(msg_buf, (char_u *)_("1 line less"),
							     MSG_BUF_LEN - 1);
	}
	else
	{
	    if (n > 0)
		vim_snprintf((char *)msg_buf, MSG_BUF_LEN,
						     _("%ld more lines"), pn);
	    else
		vim_snprintf((char *)msg_buf, MSG_BUF_LEN,
						    _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
	}
	if (got_int)
	    vim_strcat(msg_buf, (char_u *)_(" (Interrupted)"), MSG_BUF_LEN);
	if (msg(msg_buf))
	{
	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf, 0);
	    keep_msg_more = TRUE;
	}
    }
}

/*
 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
 */
    void
beep_flush()
{
    if (emsg_silent == 0)
    {
	flush_buffers(FALSE);
	vim_beep();
    }
}

/*
 * give a warning for an error
 */
    void
vim_beep()
{
    if (emsg_silent == 0)
    {
	if (p_vb
#ifdef FEAT_GUI
		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
#endif
		)
	{
	    out_str(T_VB);
	}
	else
	{
#ifdef MSDOS
	    /*
	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
	     */
	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
	    {
		out_char(BELL);
		beep_count = 1;
	    }
	    else
		++beep_count;
#else
	    out_char(BELL);
#endif
	}

	/* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
	 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
	if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
	{
	    msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
	    msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
	}
    }
}

/*
 * To get the "real" home directory:
 * - get value of $HOME
 * For Unix:
 *  - go to that directory
 *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
 *  This also works with mounts and links.
 *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
 */
static char_u	*homedir = NULL;

    void
init_homedir()
{
    char_u  *var;

    /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
    vim_free(homedir);
    homedir = NULL;

#ifdef VMS
    var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
#else
    var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
#endif

    if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
	var = NULL;

#ifdef WIN3264
    /*
     * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
     * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
     * when $HOME is being set.
     */
    if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
    {
	char_u	*p;
	char_u	*exp;

	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
	if (p != NULL)
	{
	    vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
	    {
		vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
		var = NameBuff;
		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
	    }
	}
    }

    /*
     * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
     * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
     * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
     * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
     */
    if (var == NULL)
    {
	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;

	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
	if (homepath == NULL || *homepath == NUL)
	    homepath = "\\";
	if (homedrive != NULL
			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
	{
	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
	    {
		var = NameBuff;
		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
	    }
	}
    }

# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
    if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
    {
	int	len;
	char_u  *pp = NULL;

	/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
	 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
	acp_to_enc(var, (int)STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
	if (pp != NULL)
	{
	    homedir = pp;
	    return;
	}
    }
# endif
#endif

#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
    /*
     * Default home dir is C:/
     * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
     */
    if (var == NULL)
	var = "C:/";
#endif
    if (var != NULL)
    {
#ifdef UNIX
	/*
	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
	 */
	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
	{
	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
		var = IObuff;
	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
	}
#endif
	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
    }
}

#if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
    void
free_homedir()
{
    vim_free(homedir);
}

# ifdef FEAT_CMDL_COMPL
    void
free_users()
{
    ga_clear_strings(&ga_users);
}
# endif
#endif

/*
 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
 * again soon.
 */
    char_u *
expand_env_save(src)
    char_u	*src;
{
    return expand_env_save_opt(src, FALSE);
}

/*
 * Idem, but when "one" is TRUE handle the string as one file name, only
 * expand "~" at the start.
 */
    char_u *
expand_env_save_opt(src, one)
    char_u	*src;
    int		one;
{
    char_u	*p;

    p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
    if (p != NULL)
	expand_env_esc(src, p, MAXPATHL, FALSE, one, NULL);
    return p;
}

/*
 * Expand environment variable with path name.
 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$" (not for Win32 though).
 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
 */
    void
expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
    char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
    char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
    int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
{
    expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, FALSE, NULL);
}

    void
expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, one, startstr)
    char_u	*srcp;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
    char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
    int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
    int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
    int		one;		/* "srcp" is one file name */
    char_u	*startstr;	/* start again after this (can be NULL) */
{
    char_u	*src;
    char_u	*tail;
    int		c;
    char_u	*var;
    int		copy_char;
    int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
    int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
    int		startstr_len = 0;

    if (startstr != NULL)
	startstr_len = (int)STRLEN(startstr);

    src = skipwhite(srcp);
    --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
    while (*src && dstlen > 0)
    {
	copy_char = TRUE;
	if ((*src == '$'
#ifdef VMS
		    && at_start
#endif
	   )
#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
		|| *src == '%'
#endif
		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
	{
	    mustfree = FALSE;

	    /*
	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
	     */
	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
	    {
		tail = src + 1;
		var = dst;
		c = dstlen - 1;

#ifdef UNIX
		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
		{
		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
			*var++ = *tail++;
		}
		else
#endif
		{
		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
#endif
			    ))
		    {
#ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
#else
			*var++ = *tail++;
#endif
		    }
		}

#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
# ifdef UNIX
		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
# else
		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
# endif
		    var = NULL;
		else
		{
# ifdef UNIX
		    if (src[1] == '{')
# else
		    if (*src == '%')
#endif
			++tail;
#endif
		    *var = NUL;
		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
		}
#endif
	    }
							/* home directory */
	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
	    {
		var = homedir;
		tail = src + 1;
	    }
	    else					/* user directory */
	    {
#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
		/*
		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
		 */
		tail = src;
		var = dst;
		c = dstlen - 1;
		while (	   c-- > 0
			&& *tail
			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
		    *var++ = *tail++;
		*var = NUL;
# ifdef UNIX
		/*
		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
		 */
#  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
		{
		    struct passwd *pw;

		    /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed.
		     * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */
		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
		    if (pw != NULL)
			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
		    else
			var = NULL;
		}
		if (var == NULL)
#  endif
		{
		    expand_T	xpc;

		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
		    mustfree = TRUE;
		}

# else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
		/*
		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
		 * directories to search for the user account in.
		 */
		{
		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
		    struct stat	st;

		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
		    next_path = paths;
		    while (*next_path)
		    {
			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
				next_path++);
			if (*next_path)
			    *next_path++ = NUL;
			STRCPY(test, path);
			STRCAT(test, "/");
			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
			{
			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
			    STRCPY(var, test);
			    mustfree = TRUE;
			    break;
			}
		    }
		}
# endif /* UNIX */
#else
		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
		var = NULL;
		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
	    }

#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
	    {
		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);

		if (p != NULL)
		{
		    if (mustfree)
			vim_free(var);
		    var = p;
		    mustfree = TRUE;
		    forward_slash(var);
		}
	    }
#endif

	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
	    {
		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");

		if (p != NULL)
		{
		    if (mustfree)
			vim_free(var);
		    var = p;
		    mustfree = TRUE;
		}
	    }

	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
	    {
		STRCPY(dst, var);
		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
		c = (int)STRLEN(var);
		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
		 * with it, skip a character */
		if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
			&& dst[-1] != ':'
#endif
			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
		    ++tail;
		dst += c;
		src = tail;
		copy_char = FALSE;
	    }
	    if (mustfree)
		vim_free(var);
	}

	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
	{
	    /*
	     * Recognize the start of a new name, for '~'.
	     * Don't do this when "one" is TRUE, to avoid expanding "~" in
	     * ":edit foo ~ foo".
	     */
	    at_start = FALSE;
	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
	    {
		*dst++ = *src++;
		--dstlen;
	    }
	    else if ((src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',') && !one)
		at_start = TRUE;
	    *dst++ = *src++;
	    --dstlen;

	    if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
		    && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
		at_start = TRUE;
	}
    }
    *dst = NUL;
}

/*
 * Vim's version of getenv().
 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
 * "mustfree" is set to TRUE when returned is allocated, it must be
 * initialized to FALSE by the caller.
 */
    char_u *
vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
    char_u	*name;
    int		*mustfree;
{
    char_u	*p;
    char_u	*pend;
    int		vimruntime;

#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
    /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
    if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
	return homedir;
#endif

    p = mch_getenv(name);
    if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
	p = NULL;

    if (p != NULL)
    {
#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
	if (enc_utf8)
	{
	    int	    len;
	    char_u  *pp = NULL;

	    /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
	     * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
	    acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
	    if (pp != NULL)
	    {
		p = pp;
		*mustfree = TRUE;
	    }
	}
#endif
	return p;
    }

    vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
    if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
	return NULL;

    /*
     * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
     * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
     */
    if (vimruntime
#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
#endif
       )
    {
	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
	    p = NULL;
	if (p != NULL)
	{
	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
	    if (p != NULL)
		*mustfree = TRUE;
	    else
		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");

#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
	    if (enc_utf8)
	    {
		int	len;
		char_u  *pp = NULL;

		/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions
		 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
		 * characters. */
		acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
		if (pp != NULL)
		{
		    if (*mustfree)
			vim_free(p);
		    p = pp;
		    *mustfree = TRUE;
		}
	    }
#endif
	}
    }

    /*
     * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
     * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
     * - the executable name from argv[0]
     */
    if (p == NULL)
    {
	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
	    p = p_hf;
#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
	/*
	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
	 */
	else
	    p = exe_name;
#endif
	if (p != NULL)
	{
	    /* remove the file name */
	    pend = gettail(p);

	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
	    if (p == p_hf)
		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");

#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
# ifdef MACOS_X
	    /* remove "MacOS" from exe_name and add "Resources/vim" */
	    if (p == exe_name)
	    {
		char_u	*pend1;
		char_u	*pnew;

		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"MacOS");
		if (pend1 != pend)
		{
		    pnew = alloc((unsigned)(pend1 - p) + 15);
		    if (pnew != NULL)
		    {
			STRNCPY(pnew, p, (pend1 - p));
			STRCPY(pnew + (pend1 - p), "Resources/vim");
			p = pnew;
			pend = p + STRLEN(p);
		    }
		}
	    }
# endif
	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
	    if (p == exe_name)
		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
#endif

	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
	    if (!vimruntime)
	    {
		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
	    }

	    /* remove trailing path separator */
#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
	    /* to avoid confusion between absolute and relative path */
	    if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
		--pend;
#endif

#ifdef MACOS_X
	    if (p == exe_name || p == p_hf)
#endif
		/* check that the result is a directory name */
		p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));

	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
	    {
		vim_free(p);
		p = NULL;
	    }
	    else
	    {
#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
		{
		    vim_free(p);
		    p = pend;
		}
#endif
		*mustfree = TRUE;
	    }
	}
    }

#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
    /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
     * default_vimruntime_dir */
    if (p == NULL)
    {
	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
	{
	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
	    *mustfree = FALSE;
	}
	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
	{
	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
		*mustfree = TRUE;
	    else
	    {
		p = default_vim_dir;
		*mustfree = FALSE;
	    }
	}
    }
#endif

    /*
     * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
     * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
     */
    if (p != NULL)
    {
	if (vimruntime)
	{
	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
	}
	else
	{
	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
	    didset_vim = TRUE;
	}
    }
    return p;
}

/*
 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
 */
    static char_u *
vim_version_dir(vimdir)
    char_u	*vimdir;
{
    char_u	*p;

    if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
	return NULL;
    p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
    if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
	return p;
    vim_free(p);
    p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
    if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
	return p;
    vim_free(p);
    return NULL;
}

/*
 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
 * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
 */
    static char_u *
remove_tail(p, pend, name)
    char_u	*p;
    char_u	*pend;
    char_u	*name;
{
    int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
    char_u	*newend = pend - len;

    if (newend >= p
	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
	    && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
	return newend;
    return pend;
}

/*
 * Our portable version of setenv.
 */
    void
vim_setenv(name, val)
    char_u	*name;
    char_u	*val;
{
#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
    mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
#else
    char_u	*envbuf;

    /*
     * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
     * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
     */
    envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
    if (envbuf != NULL)
    {
	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
	putenv((char *)envbuf);
    }
#endif
#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
    /*
     * When setting $VIMRUNTIME adjust the directory to find message
     * translations to $VIMRUNTIME/lang.
     */
    if (*val != NUL && STRICMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0)
    {
	char_u	*buf = concat_str(val, (char_u *)"/lang");

	if (buf != NULL)
	{
	    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
	    vim_free(buf);
	}
    }
#endif
}

#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
 */
    char_u *
get_env_name(xp, idx)
    expand_T	*xp UNUSED;
    int		idx;
{
# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
    /*
     * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
     */
    return NULL;
# else
# ifndef __WIN32__
    /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
    extern char		**environ;
# endif
# define ENVNAMELEN 100
    static char_u	name[ENVNAMELEN];
    char_u		*str;
    int			n;

    str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
    if (str == NULL)
	return NULL;

    for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
    {
	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
	    break;
	name[n] = str[n];
    }
    name[n] = NUL;
    return name;
# endif
}

/*
 * Find all user names for user completion.
 * Done only once and then cached.
 */
    static void
init_users() {
    static int	lazy_init_done = FALSE;

    if (lazy_init_done)
	return;

    lazy_init_done = TRUE;
    ga_init2(&ga_users, sizeof(char_u *), 20);

# if defined(HAVE_GETPWENT) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
    {
	char_u*		user;
	struct passwd*	pw;

	setpwent();
	while ((pw = getpwent()) != NULL)
	    /* pw->pw_name shouldn't be NULL but just in case... */
	    if (pw->pw_name != NULL)
	    {
		if (ga_grow(&ga_users, 1) == FAIL)
		    break;
		user = vim_strsave((char_u*)pw->pw_name);
		if (user == NULL)
		    break;
		((char_u **)(ga_users.ga_data))[ga_users.ga_len++] = user;
	    }
	endpwent();
    }
# endif
}

/*
 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an user names.
 */
    char_u*
get_users(xp, idx)
    expand_T	*xp UNUSED;
    int		idx;
{
    init_users();
    if (idx < ga_users.ga_len)
	return ((char_u **)ga_users.ga_data)[idx];
    return NULL;
}

/*
 * Check whether name matches a user name. Return:
 * 0 if name does not match any user name.
 * 1 if name partially matches the beginning of a user name.
 * 2 is name fully matches a user name.
 */
int match_user(name)
    char_u* name;
{
    int i;
    int n = (int)STRLEN(name);
    int result = 0;

    init_users();
    for (i = 0; i < ga_users.ga_len; i++)
    {
	if (STRCMP(((char_u **)ga_users.ga_data)[i], name) == 0)
	    return 2; /* full match */
	if (STRNCMP(((char_u **)ga_users.ga_data)[i], name, n) == 0)
	    result = 1; /* partial match */
    }
    return result;
}
#endif

/*
 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
 * 'src'.
 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
 */
    void
home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
    buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
    char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
    char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
    int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
    int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
{
    size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
    size_t	len;
    char_u	*homedir_env, *homedir_env_orig;
    char_u	*p;

    if (src == NULL)
    {
	*dst = NUL;
	return;
    }

    /*
     * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
     */
    if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
    {
	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
	return;
    }

    /*
     * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
     * "real" home directory.
     */
    if (homedir != NULL)
	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);

#ifdef VMS
    homedir_env_orig = homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
#else
    homedir_env_orig = homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
#endif
    /* Empty is the same as not set. */
    if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
	homedir_env = NULL;

#if defined(FEAT_MODIFY_FNAME) || defined(WIN3264)
    if (homedir_env != NULL && vim_strchr(homedir_env, '~') != NULL)
    {
	int	usedlen = 0;
	int	flen;
	char_u	*fbuf = NULL;

	flen = (int)STRLEN(homedir_env);
	(void)modify_fname((char_u *)":p", &usedlen,
						  &homedir_env, &fbuf, &flen);
	flen = (int)STRLEN(homedir_env);
	if (flen > 0 && vim_ispathsep(homedir_env[flen - 1]))
	    /* Remove the trailing / that is added to a directory. */
	    homedir_env[flen - 1] = NUL;
    }
#endif

    if (homedir_env != NULL)
	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);

    if (!one)
	src = skipwhite(src);
    while (*src && dstlen > 0)
    {
	/*
	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
	 * er's home directory)).
	 */
	p = homedir;
	len = dirlen;
	for (;;)
	{
	    if (   len
		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
		    || src[len] == NUL))
	    {
		src += len;
		if (--dstlen > 0)
		    *dst++ = '~';

		/*
		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
		 */
		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
		    *dst++ = '/';
		break;
	    }
	    if (p == homedir_env)
		break;
	    p = homedir_env;
	    len = envlen;
	}

	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
	    *dst++ = *src++;
	/* skip separator */
	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
	    *dst++ = *src++;
    }
    /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */

    *dst = NUL;

    if (homedir_env != homedir_env_orig)
	vim_free(homedir_env);
}

/*
 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
 */
    char_u  *
home_replace_save(buf, src)
    buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
    char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
{
    char_u	*dst;
    unsigned	len;

    len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
    if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
    dst = alloc(len);
    if (dst != NULL)
	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
    return dst;
}

/*
 * Compare two file names and return:
 * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
 * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
 * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
 * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
 * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
 */
    int
fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
    char_u *s1, *s2;
    int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
{
#ifdef UNIX
    char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
    char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
    char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
    struct stat	    st1, st2;
    int		    r1, r2;

    expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
    r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
    r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
    if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
    {
	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
	if (checkname)
	{
	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
		return FPC_SAMEX;
	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
		return FPC_SAMEX;
	}
	return FPC_NOTX;
    }
    if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
	return FPC_DIFFX;
    if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
	return FPC_SAME;
    return FPC_DIFF;
#else
    char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
    char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
    char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
    int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
    int	    r1, r2;

    /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
    if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
    {
	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;

	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);

	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
	{
	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
	    else
		retval = FPC_NOTX;
	}
	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
	else
	    retval = FPC_SAME;
	vim_free(exp1);
    }
    return retval;
#endif
}

/*
 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
 * When the path ends in a path separator the tail is the NUL after it.
 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
 */
    char_u *
gettail(fname)
    char_u *fname;
{
    char_u  *p1, *p2;

    if (fname == NULL)
	return (char_u *)"";
    for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
    {
	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
	    p1 = p2 + 1;
	mb_ptr_adv(p2);
    }
    return p1;
}

#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
static char_u *gettail_dir __ARGS((char_u *fname));

/*
 * Return the end of the directory name, on the first path
 * separator:
 * "/path/file", "/path/dir/", "/path//dir", "/file"
 *	 ^	       ^	     ^	      ^
 */
    static char_u *
gettail_dir(fname)
    char_u *fname;
{
    char_u	*dir_end = fname;
    char_u	*next_dir_end = fname;
    int		look_for_sep = TRUE;
    char_u	*p;

    for (p = fname; *p != NUL; )
    {
	if (vim_ispathsep(*p))
	{
	    if (look_for_sep)
	    {
		next_dir_end = p;
		look_for_sep = FALSE;
	    }
	}
	else
	{
	    if (!look_for_sep)
		dir_end = next_dir_end;
	    look_for_sep = TRUE;
	}
	mb_ptr_adv(p);
    }
    return dir_end;
}
#endif

/*
 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators.  Putting a NUL
 * here leaves the directory name.  Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
 * Always returns a valid pointer.
 */
    char_u *
gettail_sep(fname)
    char_u	*fname;
{
    char_u	*p;
    char_u	*t;

    p = get_past_head(fname);	/* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
    t = gettail(fname);
    while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
	--t;
#ifdef VMS
    /* path separator is part of the path */
    ++t;
#endif
    return t;
}

/*
 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
 */
    char_u *
getnextcomp(fname)
    char_u *fname;
{
    while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
	mb_ptr_adv(fname);
    if (*fname)
	++fname;
    return fname;
}

/*
 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
 * If there is no head, path is returned.
 */
    char_u *
get_past_head(path)
    char_u  *path;
{
    char_u  *retval;

#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
    /* may skip "c:" */
    if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
	retval = path + 2;
    else
	retval = path;
#else
# if defined(AMIGA)
    /* may skip "label:" */
    retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
    if (retval == NULL)
	retval = path;
# else	/* Unix */
    retval = path;
# endif
#endif

    while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
	++retval;

    return retval;
}

/*
 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
 */
    int
vim_ispathsep(c)
    int c;
{
#ifdef UNIX
    return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
#else
# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
    return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
# else
#  ifdef VMS
    /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
    return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
#  else
    return (c == ':' || c == '/');
#  endif /* VMS */
# endif
#endif
}

#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
 */
    int
vim_ispathlistsep(c)
    int c;
{
#ifdef UNIX
    return (c == ':');
#else
    return (c == ';');	/* might not be right for every system... */
#endif
}
#endif

#if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) \
	|| defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Shorten the path of a file from "~/foo/../.bar/fname" to "~/f/../.b/fname"
 * It's done in-place.
 */
    void
shorten_dir(str)
    char_u *str;
{
    char_u	*tail, *s, *d;
    int		skip = FALSE;

    tail = gettail(str);
    d = str;
    for (s = str; ; ++s)
    {
	if (s >= tail)		    /* copy the whole tail */
	{
	    *d++ = *s;
	    if (*s == NUL)
		break;
	}
	else if (vim_ispathsep(*s))	    /* copy '/' and next char */
	{
	    *d++ = *s;
	    skip = FALSE;
	}
	else if (!skip)
	{
	    *d++ = *s;		    /* copy next char */
	    if (*s != '~' && *s != '.') /* and leading "~" and "." */
		skip = TRUE;
# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	    if (has_mbyte)
	    {
		int l = mb_ptr2len(s);

		while (--l > 0)
		    *d++ = *++s;
	    }
# endif
	}
    }
}
#endif

/*
 * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise.
 * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name.
 * "fname" must be writable!.
 */
    int
dir_of_file_exists(fname)
    char_u	*fname;
{
    char_u	*p;
    int		c;
    int		retval;

    p = gettail_sep(fname);
    if (p == fname)
	return TRUE;
    c = *p;
    *p = NUL;
    retval = mch_isdir(fname);
    *p = c;
    return retval;
}

/*
 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally
 * and deal with 'fileignorecase'.
 */
    int
vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
    char_u	*x, *y;
{
#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
    return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
#else
    if (p_fic)
	return MB_STRICMP(x, y);
    return STRCMP(x, y);
#endif
}

    int
vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
    char_u	*x, *y;
    size_t	len;
{
#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
    char_u	*px = x;
    char_u	*py = y;
    int		cx = NUL;
    int		cy = NUL;

    /* TODO: multi-byte characters. */
    while (len > 0)
    {
	cx = PTR2CHAR(px);
	cy = PTR2CHAR(py);
	if (cx == NUL || cy == NUL
	    || ((p_fic ? MB_TOLOWER(cx) != MB_TOLOWER(cy) : cx != cy)
		&& !(cx == '/' && cy == '\\')
		&& !(cx == '\\' && cy == '/')))
	    break;
	len -= MB_PTR2LEN(px);
	px += MB_PTR2LEN(px);
	py += MB_PTR2LEN(py);
    }
    if (len == 0)
	return 0;
    return (cx - cy);
#else
    if (p_fic)
	return MB_STRNICMP(x, y, len);
    return STRNCMP(x, y, len);
#endif
}

/*
 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is necessary.
 */
    char_u  *
concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
    char_u  *fname1;
    char_u  *fname2;
    int	    sep;
{
    char_u  *dest;

    dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
    if (dest != NULL)
    {
	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
	if (sep)
	    add_pathsep(dest);
	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
    }
    return dest;
}

/*
 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
 */
    char_u  *
concat_str(str1, str2)
    char_u  *str1;
    char_u  *str2;
{
    char_u  *dest;
    size_t  l = STRLEN(str1);

    dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
    if (dest != NULL)
    {
	STRCPY(dest, str1);
	STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
    }
    return dest;
}

/*
 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
 * separator.
 */
    void
add_pathsep(p)
    char_u	*p;
{
    if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
}

/*
 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
 */
    char_u  *
FullName_save(fname, force)
    char_u	*fname;
    int		force;		/* force expansion, even when it already looks
				 * like a full path name */
{
    char_u	*buf;
    char_u	*new_fname = NULL;

    if (fname == NULL)
	return NULL;

    buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
    if (buf != NULL)
    {
	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
	else
	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
	vim_free(buf);
    }
    return new_fname;
}

#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)

static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));

/*
 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
 */
    pos_T *
find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
    int		ind_maxcomment;
{
    pos_T	*pos;
    char_u	*line;
    char_u	*p;
    int		cur_maxcomment = ind_maxcomment;

    for (;;)
    {
	pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, cur_maxcomment);
	if (pos == NULL)
	    break;

	/*
	 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
	 * If it is then restrict the search to below this line and try again.
	 */
	line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
	for (p = line; *p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
	    p = skip_string(p);
	if ((colnr_T)(p - line) <= pos->col)
	    break;
	cur_maxcomment = curwin->w_cursor.lnum - pos->lnum - 1;
	if (cur_maxcomment <= 0)
	{
	    pos = NULL;
	    break;
	}
    }
    return pos;
}

/*
 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
 */
    static char_u *
skip_string(p)
    char_u  *p;
{
    int	    i;

    /*
     * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
     */
    for ( ; ; ++p)
    {
	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
	{
	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
		break;
	    i = 2;
	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
	    {
		++i;
		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
		    ++i;
	    }
	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
	    {
		p += i;
		continue;
	    }
	}
	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
	{
	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
	    {
		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
		    ++p;
		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
		    break;
	    }
	    if (p[0] == '"')
		continue;
	}
	break;				    /* no string found */
    }
    if (!*p)
	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
    return p;
}
#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */

#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)

/*
 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
 */
    void
do_c_expr_indent()
{
# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
    if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
    else
# endif
	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
}

/*
 * Functions for C-indenting.
 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
 */
/*
 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
 */

static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T, linenr_T, int, int));
static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
static int	cin_is_if_for_while_before_offset __ARGS((char_u *line, int *poffset));
static int	cin_iswhileofdo_end __ARGS((int terminated, int	ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((colnr_T *col));
static int	get_baseclass_amount __ARGS((int col, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment, int ind_cpp_baseclass));
static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
static int	cin_starts_with __ARGS((char_u *s, char *word));
static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
static int	cin_is_cpp_namespace __ARGS((char_u *));

static int	ind_hash_comment = 0;   /* # starts a comment */

/*
 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
 * Also skip over Perl/shell comments if desired.
 */
    static char_u *
cin_skipcomment(s)
    char_u	*s;
{
    while (*s)
    {
	char_u *prev_s = s;

	s = skipwhite(s);

	/* Perl/shell # comment comment continues until eol.  Require a space
	 * before # to avoid recognizing $#array. */
	if (ind_hash_comment != 0 && s != prev_s && *s == '#')
	{
	    s += STRLEN(s);
	    break;
	}
	if (*s != '/')
	    break;
	++s;
	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
	{
	    s += STRLEN(s);
	    break;
	}
	if (*s != '*')
	    break;
	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
	    {
		s += 2;
		break;
	    }
    }
    return s;
}

/*
 * Return TRUE if there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
 * not considered code.
 */
    static int
cin_nocode(s)
    char_u	*s;
{
    return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
}

/*
 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
 */
    static pos_T *
find_line_comment() /* XXX */
{
    static pos_T pos;
    char_u	 *line;
    char_u	 *p;

    pos = curwin->w_cursor;
    while (--pos.lnum > 0)
    {
	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
	p = skipwhite(line);
	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
	{
	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
	    return &pos;
	}
	if (*p != NUL)
	    break;
    }
    return NULL;
}

/*
 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
 */
    static int
cin_islabel_skip(s)
    char_u	**s;
{
    if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
	return FALSE;

    while (vim_isIDc(**s))
	(*s)++;

    *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);

    /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
    return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
}

/*
 * Recognize a label: "label:".
 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
 */
    int
cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
    int		ind_maxcomment;
{
    char_u	*s;

    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());

    /*
     * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
     * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
     */
    if (cin_isdefault(s))
	return FALSE;
    if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
	return FALSE;

    if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
    {
	/*
	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
	 * label.
	 */
	pos_T	cursor_save;
	pos_T	*trypos;
	char_u	*line;

	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
	{
	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;

	    /*
	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
	     */
	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;

	    line = ml_get_curline();
	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
		continue;
	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
		continue;

	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
		    || cin_iscase(line, TRUE)
		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
		return TRUE;
	    return FALSE;
	}
	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
    }
    return FALSE;
}

/*
 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations:
 * "[typedef] [static|public|protected|private] enum"
 * "[typedef] [static|public|protected|private] = {"
 */
    static int
cin_isinit(void)
{
    char_u	*s;
    static char *skip[] = {"static", "public", "protected", "private"};

    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());

    if (cin_starts_with(s, "typedef"))
	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);

    for (;;)
    {
	int i, l;

	for (i = 0; i < (int)(sizeof(skip) / sizeof(char *)); ++i)
	{
	    l = (int)strlen(skip[i]);
	    if (cin_starts_with(s, skip[i]))
	    {
		s = cin_skipcomment(s + l);
		l = 0;
		break;
	    }
	}
	if (l != 0)
	    break;
    }

    if (cin_starts_with(s, "enum"))
	return TRUE;

    if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
	return TRUE;

    return FALSE;
}

/*
 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
 */
     int
cin_iscase(s, strict)
    char_u *s;
    int strict; /* Allow relaxed check of case statement for JS */
{
    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
    if (cin_starts_with(s, "case"))
    {
	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
	{
	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
	    if (*s == ':')
	    {
		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
		    ++s;
		else
		    return TRUE;
	    }
	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
		s += 2;			/* skip over ':' */
	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
	    else if (*s == '"')
	    {
		/* JS etc. */
		if (strict)
		    return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
		else
		    return TRUE;
	    }
	}
	return FALSE;
    }

    if (cin_isdefault(s))
	return TRUE;
    return FALSE;
}

/*
 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
 */
    static int
cin_isdefault(s)
    char_u  *s;
{
    return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
	    && s[1] != ':');
}

/*
 * Recognize a "public/private/protected" scope declaration label.
 */
    int
cin_isscopedecl(s)
    char_u	*s;
{
    int		i;

    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
    if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
	i = 6;
    else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
	i = 9;
    else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
	i = 7;
    else
	return FALSE;
    return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
}

/* Maximum number of lines to search back for a "namespace" line. */
#define FIND_NAMESPACE_LIM 20

/*
 * Recognize a "namespace" scope declaration.
 */
    static int
cin_is_cpp_namespace(s)
    char_u	*s;
{
    char_u	*p;
    int		has_name = FALSE;

    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
    if (STRNCMP(s, "namespace", 9) == 0 && (s[9] == NUL || !vim_iswordc(s[9])))
    {
	p = cin_skipcomment(skipwhite(s + 9));
	while (*p != NUL)
	{
	    if (vim_iswhite(*p))
	    {
		has_name = TRUE; /* found end of a name */
		p = cin_skipcomment(skipwhite(p));
	    }
	    else if (*p == '{')
	    {
		break;
	    }
	    else if (vim_iswordc(*p))
	    {
		if (has_name)
		    return FALSE; /* word character after skipping past name */
		++p;
	    }
	    else
	    {
		return FALSE;
	    }
	}
	return TRUE;
    }
    return FALSE;
}

/*
 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
 * Return NULL if not found.
 *	  case 234:    a = b;
 *		       ^
 */
    static char_u *
after_label(l)
    char_u  *l;
{
    for ( ; *l; ++l)
    {
	if (*l == ':')
	{
	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
		++l;
	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1, FALSE))
		break;
	}
	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
    }
    if (*l == NUL)
	return NULL;
    l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
    if (*l == NUL)
	return NULL;
    return l;
}

/*
 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
 */
    static int
get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    char_u	*l;
    pos_T	fp;
    colnr_T	col;
    char_u	*p;

    l = ml_get(lnum);
    p = after_label(l);
    if (p == NULL)
	return 0;

    fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
    fp.lnum = lnum;
    getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
    return (int)col;
}

/*
 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label) in "pp".
 *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
 *		^
 */
    static int
skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
    linenr_T	lnum;
    char_u	**pp;
    int		ind_maxcomment;
{
    char_u	*l;
    int		amount;
    pos_T	cursor_save;

    cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
    l = ml_get_curline();
				    /* XXX */
    if (cin_iscase(l, FALSE) || cin_isscopedecl(l)
					       || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
    {
	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
	    l = ml_get_curline();
    }
    else
    {
	amount = get_indent();
	l = ml_get_curline();
    }
    *pp = l;

    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
    return amount;
}

/*
 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
 *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
 *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
 *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
 */
    static int
cin_first_id_amount()
{
    char_u	*line, *p, *s;
    int		len;
    pos_T	fp;
    colnr_T	col;

    line = ml_get_curline();
    p = skipwhite(line);
    len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p);
    if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
    {
	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
	len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p);
    }
    if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
    else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
    else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
    {
	s = skipwhite(p + len);
	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
	    p = s;
    }
    for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
	;
    if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
	return 0;

    p = skipwhite(p + len);
    fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
    fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
    getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
    return (int)col;
}

/*
 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
 *       char *foo = "here";
 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
 *      foo = "asdf\
 *	       asdf\
 *	       here";
 */
    static int
cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
    linenr_T	lnum;
{
    char_u	*line;
    char_u	*s;
    colnr_T	col;
    pos_T	fp;

    if (lnum > 1)
    {
	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
	    return -1;
    }

    line = s = ml_get(lnum);
    while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
    {
	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
	else
	    ++s;
    }
    if (*s != '=')
	return 0;

    s = skipwhite(s + 1);
    if (cin_nocode(s))
	return 0;

    if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
	++s;

    fp.lnum = lnum;
    fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
    getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
    return (int)col;
}

/*
 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
 */
    static int
cin_ispreproc(s)
    char_u *s;
{
    if (*skipwhite(s) == '#')
	return TRUE;
    return FALSE;
}

/*
 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
 * start and return the line in "*pp".
 */
    static int
cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
    char_u	**pp;
    linenr_T	*lnump;
{
    char_u	*line = *pp;
    linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
    int		retval = FALSE;

    for (;;)
    {
	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
	{
	    retval = TRUE;
	    *lnump = lnum;
	    break;
	}
	if (lnum == 1)
	    break;
	line = ml_get(--lnum);
	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
	    break;
    }

    if (lnum != *lnump)
	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
    return retval;
}

/*
 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
 */
    static int
cin_iscomment(p)
    char_u  *p;
{
    return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
}

/*
 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
 */
    static int
cin_islinecomment(p)
    char_u *p;
{
    return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
}

/*
 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', ',', '{' or
 * '}'.
 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
 * If a line begins with an "else", only consider it terminated if no unmatched
 * opening braces follow (handle "else { foo();" correctly).
 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
 */
    static int
cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
    char_u	*s;
    int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
    int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
{
    char_u	found_start = 0;
    unsigned	n_open = 0;
    int		is_else = FALSE;

    s = cin_skipcomment(s);

    if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
	found_start = *s;

    if (!found_start)
	is_else = cin_iselse(s);

    while (*s)
    {
	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
	if (*s == '}' && n_open > 0)
	    --n_open;
	if ((!is_else || n_open == 0)
		&& (*s == ';' || *s == '}' || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
	    return *s;
	else if (*s == '{')
	{
	    if (incl_open && cin_nocode(s + 1))
		return *s;
	    else
		++n_open;
	}

	if (*s)
	    s++;
    }
    return found_start;
}

/*
 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
 * no semicolons anywhere.
 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
 * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
 * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
 * "min_lnum" is the line before which we will not be looking.
 */
    static int
cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum, min_lnum, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
    char_u	**sp;
    linenr_T	first_lnum;
    linenr_T	min_lnum;
    int		ind_maxparen;
    int		ind_maxcomment;
{
    char_u	*s;
    linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
    int		retval = FALSE;
    pos_T	*trypos;
    int		just_started = TRUE;

    if (sp == NULL)
	s = ml_get(lnum);
    else
	s = *sp;

    if (find_last_paren(s, '(', ')')
	&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
    {
	lnum = trypos->lnum;
	if (lnum < min_lnum)
	    return FALSE;

	s = ml_get(lnum);
    }

    /* Ignore line starting with #. */
    if (cin_ispreproc(s))
	return FALSE;

    while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
    {
	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
	else
	    ++s;
    }
    if (*s != '(')
	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */

    while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
    {
	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
	{
	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
	     *       #if defined(x) && \
	     *		 defined(y)
	     */
	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
	    s = ml_get(lnum);
	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
		retval = TRUE;
	    goto done;
	}
	if ((*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1)) || s[1] == NUL || cin_nocode(s))
	{
	    int comma = (*s == ',');

	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line.
	     * At the end: check for ',' in the next line, for this style:
	     * func(arg1
	     *       , arg2) */
	    for (;;)
	    {
		if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
		    break;
		s = ml_get(++lnum);
		if (!cin_ispreproc(s))
		    break;
	    }
	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
		break;
	    /* Require a comma at end of the line or a comma or ')' at the
	     * start of next line. */
	    s = skipwhite(s);
	    if (!just_started && (!comma && *s != ',' && *s != ')'))
		break;
	    just_started = FALSE;
	}
	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
	else
	{
	    ++s;
	    just_started = FALSE;
	}
    }

done:
    if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);

    return retval;
}

    static int
cin_isif(p)
    char_u  *p;
{
    return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
}

    static int
cin_iselse(p)
    char_u  *p;
{
    if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
    return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
}

    static int
cin_isdo(p)
    char_u  *p;
{
    return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
}

/*
 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
 */
    static int
cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
    char_u	*p;
    linenr_T	lnum;
    int		ind_maxparen;
{
    pos_T	cursor_save;
    pos_T	*trypos;
    int		retval = FALSE;

    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
    if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
    if (cin_starts_with(p, "while"))
    {
	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
	p = ml_get_curline();
	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
	{
	    ++p;
	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
	}
	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
	    retval = TRUE;
	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
    }
    return retval;
}

/*
 * Check whether in "p" there is an "if", "for" or "while" before "*poffset".
 * Return 0 if there is none.
 * Otherwise return !0 and update "*poffset" to point to the place where the
 * string was found.
 */
    static int
cin_is_if_for_while_before_offset(line, poffset)
    char_u *line;
    int    *poffset;
{
    int offset = *poffset;

    if (offset-- < 2)
	return 0;
    while (offset > 2 && vim_iswhite(line[offset]))
	--offset;

    offset -= 1;
    if (!STRNCMP(line + offset, "if", 2))
	goto probablyFound;

    if (offset >= 1)
    {
	offset -= 1;
	if (!STRNCMP(line + offset, "for", 3))
	    goto probablyFound;

	if (offset >= 2)
	{
	    offset -= 2;
	    if (!STRNCMP(line + offset, "while", 5))
		goto probablyFound;
	}
    }
    return 0;

probablyFound:
    if (!offset || !vim_isIDc(line[offset - 1]))
    {
	*poffset = offset;
	return 1;
    }
    return 0;
}

/*
 * Return TRUE if we are at the end of a do-while.
 *    do
 *       nothing;
 *    while (foo
 *	       && bar);  <-- here
 * Adjust the cursor to the line with "while".
 */
    static int
cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
    int	    terminated;
    int	    ind_maxparen;
    int	    ind_maxcomment;
{
    char_u	*line;
    char_u	*p;
    char_u	*s;
    pos_T	*trypos;
    int		i;

    if (terminated != ';')	/* there must be a ';' at the end */
	return FALSE;

    p = line = ml_get_curline();
    while (*p != NUL)
    {
	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
	if (*p == ')')
	{
	    s = skipwhite(p + 1);
	    if (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
	    {
		/* Found ");" at end of the line, now check there is "while"
		 * before the matching '('.  XXX */
		i = (int)(p - line);
		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
		trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment);
		if (trypos != NULL)
		{
		    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(trypos->lnum));
		    if (*s == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
			s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
		    if (cin_starts_with(s, "while"))
		    {
			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
			return TRUE;
		    }
		}

		/* Searching may have made "line" invalid, get it again. */
		line = ml_get_curline();
		p = line + i;
	    }
	}
	if (*p != NUL)
	    ++p;
    }
    return FALSE;
}

    static int
cin_isbreak(p)
    char_u  *p;
{
    return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
}

/*
 * Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
 * constructor-initialization. eg:
 *
 * class MyClass :
 *	baseClass		<-- here
 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
 *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
 *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
 *
 * This is a lot of guessing.  Watch out for "cond ? func() : foo".
 */
    static int
cin_is_cpp_baseclass(col)
    colnr_T	*col;	    /* return: column to align with */
{
    char_u	*s;
    int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
    linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
    char_u	*line = ml_get_curline();

    *col = 0;

    s = skipwhite(line);
    if (*s == '#')		/* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
	return FALSE;
    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
    if (*s == NUL)
	return FALSE;

    cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;

    /* Search for a line starting with '#', empty, ending in ';' or containing
     * '{' or '}' and start below it.  This handles the following situations:
     *	a = cond ?
     *	      func() :
     *		   asdf;
     *	func::foo()
     *	      : something
     *	{}
     *	Foo::Foo (int one, int two)
     *		: something(4),
     *		somethingelse(3)
     *	{}
     */
    while (lnum > 1)
    {
	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
	s = skipwhite(line);
	if (*s == '#' || *s == NUL)
	    break;
	while (*s != NUL)
	{
	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
	    if (*s == '{' || *s == '}'
		    || (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1)))
		break;
	    if (*s != NUL)
		++s;
	}
	if (*s != NUL)
	    break;
	--lnum;
    }

    line = ml_get(lnum);
    s = cin_skipcomment(line);
    for (;;)
    {
	if (*s == NUL)
	{
	    if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
		break;
	    /* Continue in the cursor line. */
	    line = ml_get(++lnum);
	    s = cin_skipcomment(line);
	    if (*s == NUL)
		continue;
	}

	if (s[0] == '"')
	    s = skip_string(s) + 1;
	else if (s[0] == ':')
	{
	    if (s[1] == ':')
	    {
		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
		 * initialization any more */
		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
	    }
	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
	    {
		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or constructor-initialization */
		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
		*col = 0;
		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
	    }
	    else
		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
	}
	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
	{
	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;

	    if (*s == 'c')
		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
	    else
		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
	}
	else
	{
	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
	    {
		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
	    }
	    else if (s[0] == ')')
	    {
		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
		 * something like "):" */
		class_or_struct = FALSE;
		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
	    }
	    else if (s[0] == '?')
	    {
		/* Avoid seeing '() :' after '?' as constructor init. */
		return FALSE;
	    }
	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
	    {
		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
		class_or_struct = FALSE;
		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
	    }
	    else if (*col == 0)
	    {
		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;

		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
		if (cpp_base_class)
		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
	    }

	    /* When the line ends in a comma don't align with it. */
	    if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum && *s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
		*col = 0;

	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
	}
    }

    return cpp_base_class;
}

    static int
get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass)
    int		col;
    int		ind_maxparen;
    int		ind_maxcomment;
    int		ind_cpp_baseclass;
{
    int		amount;
    colnr_T	vcol;
    pos_T	*trypos;

    if (col == 0)
    {
	amount = get_indent();
	if (find_last_paren(ml_get_curline(), '(', ')')
		&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
	    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
	if (!cin_ends_in(ml_get_curline(), (char_u *)",", NULL))
	    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
    }
    else
    {
	curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
	getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &vcol, NULL, NULL);
	amount = (int)vcol;
    }
    if (amount < ind_cpp_baseclass)
	amount = ind_cpp_baseclass;
    return amount;
}

/*
 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
 * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
 */
    static int
cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
    char_u	*s;
    char_u	*find;
    char_u	*ignore;
{
    char_u	*p = s;
    char_u	*r;
    int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);

    while (*p != NUL)
    {
	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
	{
	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
	    if (cin_nocode(r))
		return TRUE;
	}
	if (*p != NUL)
	    ++p;
    }
    return FALSE;
}

/*
 * Return TRUE when "s" starts with "word" and then a non-ID character.
 */
    static int
cin_starts_with(s, word)
    char_u *s;
    char *word;
{
    int l = (int)STRLEN(word);

    return (STRNCMP(s, word, l) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[l]));
}

/*
 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
 * Return the column found.
 */
    static int
cin_skip2pos(trypos)
    pos_T	*trypos;
{
    char_u	*line;
    char_u	*p;

    p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
    while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
    {
	if (cin_iscomment(p))
	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
	else
	{
	    p = skip_string(p);
	    ++p;
	}
    }
    return (int)(p - line);
}

/*
 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
 * Return NULL if no match found.
 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
 * work. */
/* foo()    */
/* {	    */
/* }	    */

    static pos_T *
find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
    int		ind_maxcomment;
{
    pos_T	cursor_save;
    pos_T	*trypos;
    pos_T	*pos;
    static pos_T	pos_copy;

    cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
    while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
    {
	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
	trypos = &pos_copy;
	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
	pos = NULL;
	/* ignore the { if it's in a // or / *  * / comment */
	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
	    break;
	if (pos != NULL)
	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
    }
    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
    return trypos;
}

/*
 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
 * Return NULL if no match found.
 */
    static pos_T *
find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
    int		ind_maxparen;
    int		ind_maxcomment;
{
    pos_T	cursor_save;
    pos_T	*trypos;
    static pos_T pos_copy;

    cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
    if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
    {
	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
	    trypos = NULL;
	else
	{
	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
	    trypos = &pos_copy;
	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
		trypos = NULL;
	}
    }
    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
    return trypos;
}

/*
 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
 * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
 * looking a few lines further.
 */
    static int
corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
    int		ind_maxparen;
    pos_T	*startpos;
{
    long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;

    if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
    return ind_maxparen;
}

/*
 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
 * line "l".  "l" must point to the start of the line.
 */
    static int
find_last_paren(l, start, end)
    char_u	*l;
    int		start, end;
{
    int		i;
    int		retval = FALSE;
    int		open_count = 0;

    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */

    for (i = 0; l[i] != NUL; i++)
    {
	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
	if (l[i] == start)
	    ++open_count;
	else if (l[i] == end)
	{
	    if (open_count > 0)
		--open_count;
	    else
	    {
		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
		retval = TRUE;
	    }
	}
    }
    return retval;
}

    int
get_c_indent()
{
    int sw = (int)get_sw_value();

    /*
     * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
     * block should be
     */

    int ind_level = sw;

    /*
     * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
     * line is imagined to be.
     */
    int ind_open_imag = 0;

    /*
     * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not preceded by
     * an opening brace.
     */
    int ind_no_brace = 0;

    /*
     * column where the first { of a function should be located }
     */
    int ind_first_open = 0;

    /*
     * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
     * located
     */
    int ind_open_extra = 0;

    /*
     * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
     * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
     * brace should be located
     */
    int ind_close_extra = 0;

    /*
     * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
     * column is imagined to be
     */
    int ind_open_left_imag = 0;

    /*
     * Spaces jump labels should be shifted to the left if N is non-negative,
     * otherwise the jump label will be put to column 1.
     */
    int ind_jump_label = -1;

    /*
     * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
     */
    int ind_case = sw;

    /*
     * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
     */
    int ind_case_code = sw;

    /*
     * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
     */
    int ind_case_break = 0;

    /*
     * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
     * should be located
     */
    int ind_scopedecl = sw;

    /*
     * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
     */
    int ind_scopedecl_code = sw;

    /*
     * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
     */
    int ind_param = sw;

    /*
     * amount a function type spec should be indented
     */
    int ind_func_type = sw;

    /*
     * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
     * should be indented
     */
    int ind_cpp_baseclass = sw;

    /*
     * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
     * should be located
     */
    int ind_continuation = sw;

    /*
     * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
     */
    int ind_unclosed = sw * 2;

    /*
     * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
     * itself is also unclosed
     */
    int ind_unclosed2 = sw;

    /*
     * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
     * unclosed parentheses.
     */
    int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;

    /*
     * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
     * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
     * context (for very long lines).
     */
    int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;

    /*
     * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
     * an unclosed parentheses.
     */
    int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;

    /*
     * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
     * opening parentheses.
     */
    int ind_matching_paren = 0;

    /*
     * indent a closing parentheses under the previous line.
     */
    int ind_paren_prev = 0;

    /*
     * Extra indent for comments.
     */
    int ind_comment = 0;

    /*
     * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
     */
    int ind_in_comment = 3;

    /*
     * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
     * after the comment opener.
     */
    int ind_in_comment2 = 0;

    /*
     * max lines to search for an open paren
     */
    int ind_maxparen = 20;

    /*
     * max lines to search for an open comment
     */
    int ind_maxcomment = 70;

    /*
     * handle braces for java code
     */
    int	ind_java = 0;

    /*
     * not to confuse JS object properties with labels
     */
    int ind_js = 0;

    /*
     * handle blocked cases correctly
     */
    int ind_keep_case_label = 0;

    /*
     * handle C++ namespace
     */
    int ind_cpp_namespace = 0;

    /*
     * handle continuation lines containing conditions of if(), for() and
     * while()
     */
    int ind_if_for_while = 0;

    pos_T	cur_curpos;
    int		amount;
    int		scope_amount;
    int		cur_amount = MAXCOL;
    colnr_T	col;
    char_u	*theline;
    char_u	*linecopy;
    pos_T	*trypos;
    pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
    pos_T	our_paren_pos;
    char_u	*start;
    int		start_brace;
#define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
#define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
#define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
    linenr_T	ourscope;
    char_u	*l;
    char_u	*look;
    char_u	terminated;
    int		lookfor;
#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
#define LOOKFOR_IF		1
#define LOOKFOR_DO		2
#define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
#define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
#define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10

    int		whilelevel;
    linenr_T	lnum;
    char_u	*options;
    char_u	*digits;
    int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
    int		divider;
    int		n;
    int		iscase;
    int		lookfor_break;
    int		lookfor_cpp_namespace = FALSE;
    int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
    int		original_line_islabel;
    int		added_to_amount = 0;

    for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
    {
	l = options++;
	if (*options == '-')
	    ++options;
	digits = options;	    /* remember where the digits start */
	n = getdigits(&options);
	divider = 0;
	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
	{
	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
	    {
		++options;
		if (divider)
		    divider *= 10;
		else
		    divider = 10;
	    }
	}
	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
	{
	    if (options == digits)
		n = sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
	    else
	    {
		n *= sw;
		if (divider)
		    n += (sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
	    }
	    ++options;
	}
	if (l[1] == '-')
	    n = -n;
	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
	 * doc/indent.txt, and add explanation for it! */
	switch (*l)
	{
	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
	    case 'L': ind_jump_label = n; break;
	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
	    case 'M': ind_paren_prev = n; break;
	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
	    case 'J': ind_js = n; break;
	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
	    case '#': ind_hash_comment = n; break;
	    case 'N': ind_cpp_namespace = n; break;
	    case 'k': ind_if_for_while = n; break;
	}
	if (*options == ',')
	    ++options;
    }

    /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
    cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;

    /* if we are at line 1 0 is fine, right? */
    if (cur_curpos.lnum == 1)
	return 0;

    /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
     * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
     * ml_get is valid! */
    linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
    if (linecopy == NULL)
	return 0;

    /*
     * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
     * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
     * inserting new stuff.
     * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
     * check for that.
     */
    if ((State & INSERT)
	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < (colnr_T)STRLEN(linecopy)
	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;

    theline = skipwhite(linecopy);

    /* move the cursor to the start of the line */

    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;

    original_line_islabel = cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */

    /*
     * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
     */
    if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
    {
	amount = 0;
    }

    /*
     * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too unless:
     *  - JS flag is set.
     *  - 'L' item has a positive value.
     */
    else if (original_line_islabel && !ind_js && ind_jump_label < 0)
    {
	amount = 0;
    }

    /*
     * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
     * previous line, lineup with that one.
     */
    else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
    {
	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
	amount = col;
    }

    /*
     * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
     * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
     */
    else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
    {
	int	lead_start_len = 2;
	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
	char_u	*p;
	int	start_align = 0;
	int	start_off = 0;
	int	done = FALSE;

	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
	amount = col;
	*lead_start = NUL;
	*lead_middle = NUL;

	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
	while (*p != NUL)
	{
	    int	align = 0;
	    int	off = 0;
	    int what = 0;

	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
	    {
		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
		    what = *p++;
		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
		    align = *p++;
		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
		    off = getdigits(&p);
		else
		    ++p;
	    }

	    if (*p == ':')
		++p;
	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
	    if (what == COM_START)
	    {
		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
		start_off = off;
		start_align = align;
	    }
	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
	    {
		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
	    }
	    else if (what == COM_END)
	    {
		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
		{
		    done = TRUE;
		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
		    {
			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
			 * line, use the indent of that line plus offset.  If
			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
							lead_middle_len) == 0)
			{
			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
			    break;
			}
			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
			    continue;
		    }
		    if (start_off != 0)
			amount += start_off;
		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
		    break;
		}

		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
		 * with the middle comment */
		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
		{
		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
								     /* XXX */
		    if (off != 0)
			amount += off;
		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
		    done = TRUE;
		    break;
		}
	    }
	}

	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
	 * with the first character of the comment text.
	 */
	if (done)
	    ;
	else if (theline[0] == '*')
	    amount += 1;
	else
	{
	    /*
	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
	     */
	    amount = -1;
	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
	    {
		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
		    continue;
		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
		break;
	    }
	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
	    {
		if (!ind_in_comment2)
		{
		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
		}
		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
		amount = col;
		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
		    amount += ind_in_comment;
	    }
	}
    }

    /*
     * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
     */						    /* XXX */
    else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
		&& ind_java == 0)
	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
	    || trypos != NULL)
    {
      if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
      {
	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
	      trypos = NULL;
	  else
	      tryposBrace = NULL;
      }

      if (trypos != NULL)
      {
	/*
	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
	 */
	if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_paren_prev)
	{
	    /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
	    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);  /* XXX */
	}
	else
	{
	    amount = -1;
	    our_paren_pos = *trypos;
	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
	    {
		l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
		if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
		    continue;
		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))
		    continue;			/* ignore #define, #if, etc. */
		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;

		/* Skip a comment. XXX */
		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
		{
		    lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
		    continue;
		}

		/* XXX */
		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
				corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
			&& trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
			&& trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
		{
			amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */

			if (theline[0] == ')')
			{
			    if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum
						       && cur_amount > amount)
				cur_amount = amount;
			    amount = -1;
			}
		    break;
		}
	    }
	}

	/*
	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
	 */
	if (amount == -1)
	{
	    int	    ignore_paren_col = 0;
	    int	    is_if_for_while = 0;

	    if (ind_if_for_while)
	    {
		/* Look for the outermost opening parenthesis on this line
		 * and check whether it belongs to an "if", "for" or "while". */

		pos_T	    cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
		pos_T	    outermost;
		char_u	    *line;

		trypos = &our_paren_pos;
		do {
		    outermost = *trypos;
		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = outermost.lnum;
		    curwin->w_cursor.col = outermost.col;

		    trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment);
		} while (trypos && trypos->lnum == outermost.lnum);

		curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;

		line = ml_get(outermost.lnum);

		is_if_for_while =
		    cin_is_if_for_while_before_offset(line, &outermost.col);
	    }

	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
	    look = skipwhite(look);
	    if (*look == '(')
	    {
		linenr_T    save_lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
		char_u	    *line;
		int	    look_col;

		/* Ignore a '(' in front of the line that has a match before
		 * our matching '('. */
		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
		line = ml_get_curline();
		look_col = (int)(look - line);
		curwin->w_cursor.col = look_col + 1;
		if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, ')', 0, ind_maxparen))
								      != NULL
			  && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
			  && trypos->col < our_paren_pos.col)
		    ignore_paren_col = trypos->col + 1;

		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = save_lnum;
		look = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum) + look_col;
	    }
	    if (theline[0] == ')' || (ind_unclosed == 0 && is_if_for_while == 0)
		    || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *look == '('
						    && ignore_paren_col == 0))
	    {
		/*
		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
		 * lines).
		 */
		if (theline[0] != ')')
		{
		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
		    {
			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
			 * for each additional level */
			n = 1;
			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
			{
			    switch (l[col])
			    {
				case '(':
				case '{': ++n;
					  break;

				case ')':
				case '}': if (n > 1)
					      --n;
					  break;
			    }
			}

			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
		    }
		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
			our_paren_pos.col++;
		    else
		    {
			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
			    col++;
			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
			else
			    our_paren_pos.col++;
		    }
		}

		/*
		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
		 * if we did the above "if".
		 */
		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
		{
		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
			cur_amount = col;
		}
	    }

	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
	    {
		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
	    }
	    else if ((ind_unclosed == 0 && is_if_for_while == 0)
		     || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
				    && *look == '(' && ignore_paren_col == 0))
	    {
		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
		    amount = cur_amount;
	    }
	    else
	    {
		/* Add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one, but
		 * ignore (void) before the line (ignore_paren_col). */
		col = our_paren_pos.col;
		while ((int)our_paren_pos.col > ignore_paren_col)
		{
		    --our_paren_pos.col;
		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
		    {
			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
				  break;
			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
				  col = MAXCOL;
				  break;
		    }
		}

		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
		 * braces */
		if (col == MAXCOL)
		    amount += ind_unclosed;
		else
		{
		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
		    if (find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) != NULL)
			amount += ind_unclosed2;
		    else
		    {
			if (is_if_for_while)
			    amount += ind_if_for_while;
			else
			    amount += ind_unclosed;
		    }
		}
		/*
		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
		 * lines:
		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
		 *	arg				    && yy
		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
		 */
		if (cur_amount < amount)
		    amount = cur_amount;
	    }
	}

	/* add extra indent for a comment */
	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
	    amount += ind_comment;
      }

      /*
       * Are we at least inside braces, then?
       */
      else
      {
	trypos = tryposBrace;

	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
	start = ml_get(ourscope);

	/*
	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
	 */
	look = skipwhite(start);
	if (*look == '{')
	{
	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
	    amount = col;
	    if (*start == '{')
		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
	    else
		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
	}
	else
	{
	    /*
	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
	     */
	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;

	    /*
	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
	     */
	    lnum = ourscope;
	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
		lnum = trypos->lnum;

	    /*
	     * It could have been something like
	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
	     *			ldfd) {
	     *		    }
	     */
	    if (ind_js || (ind_keep_case_label
			   && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline()), FALSE)))
		amount = get_indent();
	    else
		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);

	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
	}

	/*
	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
	 */
	if (theline[0] == '}')
	{
	    /*
	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
	     */
	    amount += ind_close_extra;
	}
	else
	{
	    /*
	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
	     * to match it with.
	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
	     * to match it with.
	     */
	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
								    /* XXX */
		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
	    {
		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
		{
		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
		    goto theend;
		}
	    }

	    /*
	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
	     * failed to find a matching "if").
	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
	     */

	    /*
	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
	     * location for ind_open_extra.
	     */

	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
	    {
		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
		lookfor_cpp_namespace = TRUE;
	    }
	    else if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_START &&
		    lookfor_cpp_namespace)	  /* '{' is at start */
	    {

		lookfor_cpp_namespace = TRUE;
	    }
	    else
	    {
		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
		{
		    amount += ind_open_imag;

		    l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
		    if (cin_is_cpp_namespace(l))
			amount += ind_cpp_namespace;
		}
		else
		{
		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
		    if (amount < 0)
			amount = 0;
		}
	    }

	    lookfor_break = FALSE;

	    if (cin_iscase(theline, FALSE))	/* it's a switch() label */
	    {
		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
		amount += ind_case;
	    }
	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
	    {
		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
		amount += ind_scopedecl;
	    }
	    else
	    {
		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
		    lookfor_break = TRUE;

		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
	    }
	    scope_amount = amount;
	    whilelevel = 0;

	    /*
	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
	     * with that.
	     *
	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
	     * that opens the block.
	     */
	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
	    for (;;)
	    {
		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;

		/*
		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
		 * up with it.
		 */
		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
		{
		    /* we reached end of scope:
		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
		     * go further back:
		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
		     * declaration:
		     * int x,
		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
		     */
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
		    {
			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
			{
			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
			     * initialization) */
			    if (cont_amount > 0)
				amount = cont_amount;
			    else if (!ind_js)
				amount += ind_continuation;
			    break;
			}

			l = ml_get_curline();

			/*
			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
			 * comment.
			 */
			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
			if (trypos != NULL)
			{
			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
			    continue;
			}

			/*
			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
			 */
			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
			    continue;

			if (cin_nocode(l))
			    continue;

			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);

			/*
			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
			 * function declaration, we are done
			 * (it's a variable declaration).
			 */
			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
					     0, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment))
			{
			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
			     * don't add extra indent.
			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
			     */
			    if (terminated == ',')
				break;

			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
			     * we are done.
			     */
			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
				break;

			    /* nothing useful found */
			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
				continue;
			}

			if (terminated != ';')
			{
			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
			     */					/* XXX */
			    trypos = NULL;
			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
					ind_maxcomment);

			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);

			    if (trypos != NULL)
			    {
				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
				curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
				continue;
			    }
			}

			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
			 * like in
			 * int a,
			 *    b;
			 */
			if (cont_amount > 0)
			    amount = cont_amount;
			else
			    amount += ind_continuation;
		    }
		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
		    {
			if (cont_amount > 0)
			    amount = cont_amount;
			else
			    amount += ind_continuation;
		    }
		    else
		    {
			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
			{
			    amount = scope_amount;
			    if (theline[0] == '{')
			    {
				amount += ind_open_extra;
				added_to_amount = ind_open_extra;
			    }
			}

			if (lookfor_cpp_namespace)
			{
			    /*
			     * Looking for C++ namespace, need to look further
			     * back.
			     */
			    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == ourscope)
				continue;

			    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
				    || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
					      < ourscope - FIND_NAMESPACE_LIM)
				break;

			    l = ml_get_curline();

			    /* If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of
			     * the comment. */
			    trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
			    if (trypos != NULL)
			    {
				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
				curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
				continue;
			    }

			    /* Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines. */
			    if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
				continue;

			    /* Finally the actual check for "namespace". */
			    if (cin_is_cpp_namespace(l))
			    {
				amount += ind_cpp_namespace - added_to_amount;
				break;
			    }

			    if (cin_nocode(l))
				continue;
			}
		    }
		    break;
		}

		/*
		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
		 */					    /* XXX */
		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
		{
		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
		    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
		    continue;
		}

		l = ml_get_curline();

		/*
		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
		 * If this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
		 */
		iscase = cin_iscase(l, FALSE);
		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
		{
		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
			break;

		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
		     * labels. */
		    if (whilelevel > 0)
			continue;

		    /*
		     *	case xx:
		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
		     *->	   here;
		     */
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
		    {
			if (cont_amount > 0)
			    amount = cont_amount;
			else
			    amount += ind_continuation;
			break;
		    }

		    /*
		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
		     *	    x = 333;
		     *	case yy:
		     */
		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
		    {
			/*
			 * Check that this case label is not for another
			 * switch()
			 */				    /* XXX */
			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
			{
			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
			    break;
			}
			continue;
		    }

		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */

		    /*
		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
		     *		      y = y + 1;
		     * ->	  s = 99;
		     *
		     *	 case xx:
		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
		     *		 y = y + 1;
		     * ->    s = 99;
		     */
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
		    {
			if (n)
			    amount = n;

			if (!lookfor_break)
			    break;
		    }

		    /*
		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
		     *
		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
		     */
		    if (n)
		    {
			amount = n;
			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
			{
			    if (theline[0] == '{')
				amount += ind_open_extra;
			    else
				amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
			}
			break;
		    }

		    /*
		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
		     * switch label.
		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
		     *	 case xx:
		     * ->   y = 1;
		     */
		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
		    continue;
		}

		/*
		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
		 */
		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
		{
		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
		    {
			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
		    }
		    continue;
		}

		/*
		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
		 */
		if (!ind_js && cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
		{
		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
			continue;
		}

		/*
		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
		 * unlocked it)
		 */
		l = ml_get_curline();
		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
							     || cin_nocode(l))
		    continue;

		/*
		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
		 * constructor initialization?
		 */						    /* XXX */
		n = FALSE;
		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass > 0)
		{
		    n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(&col);
		    l = ml_get_curline();
		}
		if (n)
		{
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
		    {
			if (cont_amount > 0)
			    amount = cont_amount;
			else
			    amount += ind_continuation;
		    }
		    else if (theline[0] == '{')
		    {
			/* Need to find start of the declaration. */
			lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
			ind_continuation = 0;
			continue;
		    }
		    else
								     /* XXX */
			amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen,
					   ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass);
		    break;
		}
		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
		{
		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace.
		     */
		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
			break;
		    else
			continue;
		}

		/*
		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
		 * there is another unterminated statement behind, eg:
		 *   123,
		 *   sizeof
		 *	  here
		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
		 * (indented).
		 */
		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);

		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
							&& terminated == ','))
		{
		    /*
		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
		     * go back to the line that starts it so
		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
		     *	   if ( foo &&
		     *		    bar )
		     */
		    /*
		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
		     */
		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
		    trypos = find_match_paren(
				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
							      ind_maxcomment);

		    /*
		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
		     * braces.
		     */
		    if (trypos == NULL && terminated == ','
					      && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);

		    if (trypos != NULL)
		    {
			/*
			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
			 * handled above.
			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
			 *			asdf)
			 */
			curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
			l = ml_get_curline();
			if (cin_iscase(l, FALSE) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
			{
			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
			    continue;
			}
		    }

		    /*
		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
		     * indent from
		     * char *usethis = "bla\
		     *		 bla",
		     *      here;
		     */
		    if (terminated == ',')
		    {
			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
			{
			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
				break;
			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
			}
		    }

		    /*
		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
		     */
		    if (!ind_js)
			cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
		    else
			cur_amount = get_indent();
		    /*
		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
		     *		while (not)
		     * ->	{
		     *		}
		     */
		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
							 && theline[0] == '{')
		    {
			amount = cur_amount;
			/*
			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
			 *	{ 1, 2 },
			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
			 */
			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
			    amount += ind_open_extra;

			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
			{
			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
			     * class declaration or initialization */
			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
			    continue;
			}
			break;
		    }

		    /*
		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
		     * Also allow "   } else".
		     */
		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
		    {
			/*
			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
			 * with the last one.
			 *   if (cond)
			 *	    100 +
			 * ->		here;
			 */
			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
			{
			    if (cont_amount > 0)
				amount = cont_amount;
			    else
				amount += ind_continuation;
			    break;
			}

			/*
			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
			 * are finished.
			 *	    while (not)
			 * ->		here;
			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
			 * before this is terminated.
			 *	yyy;
			 *	if (stat)
			 *	    while (not)
			 *		xxx;
			 * ->	here;
			 */
			amount = cur_amount;
			if (theline[0] == '{')
			    amount += ind_open_extra;
			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
			{
			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
			    break;
			}

			/*
			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
			 * do, line up with the while()
			 *     do
			 *	    x = 1;
			 * ->  here
			 */
			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
			if (cin_isdo(l))
			{
			    if (whilelevel == 0)
				break;
			    --whilelevel;
			}

			/*
			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
			 * one between the "if" and the matching "else".
			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
			 */
			if (cin_iselse(l) && whilelevel == 0)
			{
			    /* If we're looking at "} else", let's make sure we
			     * find the opening brace of the enclosing scope,
			     * not the one from "if () {". */
			    if (*l == '}')
				curwin->w_cursor.col =
					  (colnr_T)(l - ml_get_curline()) + 1;

			    if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
								       == NULL
				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)
				break;
			}
		    }

		    /*
		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
		     * add something for a continuation line, depending on
		     * the line before this one.
		     */
		    else
		    {
			/*
			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
			 * the last one.
			 *   c = 99 +
			 *	    100 +
			 * ->	    here;
			 */
			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
			{
			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
			    if (terminated == ',')
				amount += ind_continuation;
			    break;
			}

			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
			{
			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
			     * enumerations/initializations. */
			    if (terminated == ',')
			    {
				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
				    break;

				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
				continue;
			    }

			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
			     * reduce indent. */
			    if (amount > cur_amount)
				amount = cur_amount;
			}
			else
			{
			    /*
			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
			     *	    100 +
			     * ->	    here;
			     */
			    amount = cur_amount;

			    /*
			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
			     * are in an initialization or enum
			     * struct xxx =
			     * {
			     *      sizeof a,
			     *      124 };
			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
			     * yet.
			     */
			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
			    {
				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
			    }
			    else
			    {
				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
					&& *l != NUL
					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
								/* XXX */
				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
			    }
			}
		    }
		}

		/*
		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
		 */
							/* XXX */
		else if (cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen,
							      ind_maxcomment))
		{
		    /*
		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
		     * with the last one.
		     *	    while (cond);
		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
		     * ->	    here;
		     */
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
		    {
			if (cont_amount > 0)
			    amount = cont_amount;
			else
			    amount += ind_continuation;
			break;
		    }

		    if (whilelevel == 0)
		    {
			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
			if (theline[0] == '{')
			    amount += ind_open_extra;
		    }
		    ++whilelevel;
		}

		/*
		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
		 * indent of that other statement.
		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
		 */
		else
		{
		    /*
		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
		     * may be lined up with the case label.
		     */
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
		    {
			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
			continue;
		    }

		    /*
		     * Handle "do {" line.
		     */
		    if (whilelevel > 0)
		    {
			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
			if (cin_isdo(l))
			{
			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
			    --whilelevel;
			    continue;
			}
		    }

		    /*
		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
		     * the amount for a continuation line.
		     *	 x = 1;
		     *	 y = foo +
		     * ->	here;
		     * or
		     *	 int x = 1;
		     *	 int foo,
		     * ->	here;
		     */
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
		    {
			if (cont_amount > 0)
			    amount = cont_amount;
			else
			    amount += ind_continuation;
			break;
		    }

		    /*
		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
		     *		here;
		     * ->foo;
		     */
		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
		    {
			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
			    break;
		    }

		    /*
		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
		     * a terminated line.
		     */
		    else
		    {
			/*
			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
			 * the line.  Helps for:
			 *     func(asdr,
			 *	      asdfasdf);
			 *     here;
			 */
term_again:
			l = ml_get_curline();
			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
			{
			    /*
			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
			     * handled above.
			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
			     *			    asdf)
			     */
			    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
			    l = ml_get_curline();
			    if (cin_iscase(l, FALSE) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
			    {
				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
				curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
				continue;
			    }
			}

			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
			 * with a statement after it.
			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
			 *	stat;
			 *  }
			 *  case 2:
			 *	stat;
			 * }
			 */
			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l, FALSE));

			/*
			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
			 * ignoring any jump label.
			 */
			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
							  &l, ind_maxcomment);

			if (theline[0] == '{')
			    amount += ind_open_extra;
			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
			l = skipwhite(l);
			if (*l == '{')
			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;

			/*
			 * When a terminated line starts with "else" skip to
			 * the matching "if":
			 *       else 3;
			 *	     indent this;
			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
			 */
			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM
				&& *l != '}'
				&& cin_iselse(l)
				&& whilelevel == 0)
			{
			    if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
								       == NULL
				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)
				break;
			    continue;
			}

			/*
			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
			 * that block.
			 */
			l = ml_get_curline();
			if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}')
				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
							    != NULL) /* XXX */
			{
			    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
				goto term_again;
			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
			}
		    }
		}
	    }
	}
      }

      /* add extra indent for a comment */
      if (cin_iscomment(theline))
	  amount += ind_comment;

      /* subtract extra left-shift for jump labels */
      if (ind_jump_label > 0 && original_line_islabel)
	  amount -= ind_jump_label;
    }

    /*
     * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
     *
     * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
     * basically just match where the previous line is, except
     * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
     * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
     */
    else
    {
	/*
	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
	 * of a function
	 */

	if (theline[0] == '{')
	{
	    amount = ind_first_open;
	}

	/*
	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment or if the
	 * current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';', or if the current line
	 * contains { or }: "void f() {\n if (1)"
	 */
	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
		&& vim_strchr(theline, '{') == NULL
		&& vim_strchr(theline, '}') == NULL
		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1,
				  cur_curpos.lnum + 1,
				  ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
	{
	    amount = ind_func_type;
	}
	else
	{
	    amount = 0;
	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;

	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */

	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
	    {
		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;

		l = ml_get_curline();

		/*
		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
		 */						/* XXX */
		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
		{
		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
		    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
		    continue;
		}

		/*
		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
		 * constructor initialization?
		 */						    /* XXX */
		n = FALSE;
		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{')
		{
		    n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(&col);
		    l = ml_get_curline();
		}
		if (n)
		{
								     /* XXX */
		    amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen,
					   ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass);
		    break;
		}

		/*
		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
		 */
		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
		    continue;

		if (cin_nocode(l))
		    continue;

		/*
		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
		 * indentation:
		 * int foo,
		 *     bar;
		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
		 * enum foobar
		 * {
		 *   ...
		 * } foo,
		 *   bar;
		 */
		n = 0;
		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
		{
		    /* take us back to opening paren */
		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
			curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;

		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
		     * char *foo = "bla\
		     *		 bla",
		     *      here;
		     */
		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
		    {
			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
			    break;
			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
		    }

		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */

		    if (amount == 0)
			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
		    if (amount == 0)
			amount = ind_continuation;
		    break;
		}

		/*
		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
		 */
		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum, 0,
				   ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment))  /* XXX */
		    break;
		l = ml_get_curline();

		/*
		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
		 */
		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
		    break;

		/*			    (matching {)
		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
		 */
		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
		    break;

		/*
		 * Find a line only has a semicolon that belongs to a previous
		 * line ending in '}', e.g. before an #endif.  Don't increase
		 * indent then.
		 */
		if (*(look = skipwhite(l)) == ';' && cin_nocode(look + 1))
		{
		    pos_T curpos_save = curwin->w_cursor;

		    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
		    {
			look = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
			if (!(cin_nocode(look) || cin_ispreproc_cont(
					      &look, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
			    break;
		    }
		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 0
				    && cin_ends_in(look, (char_u *)"}", NULL))
			break;

		    curwin->w_cursor = curpos_save;
		}

		/*
		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
		 * parameters.
		 */
		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0,
				   ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment))
		{
		    amount = ind_param;
		    break;
		}

		/*
		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
		 * int foo,
		 *     bar;
		 * indent_to_0 here;
		 */
		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)";", NULL))
		{
		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
			break;
		    l = ml_get_curline();
		}

		/*
		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
		 * use the indent of this line.
		 *
		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
		 */
		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');

		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
		    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
		break;
	    }

	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
		amount += ind_comment;

	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
	     *	      "asdfasdf\
	     *		  here";
	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
	     *			 here";
	     */
	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
	    {
		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
		{
		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
		    if (cur_amount > 0)
			amount = cur_amount;
		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
			amount += ind_continuation;
		}
	    }
	}
    }

theend:
    /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;

    vim_free(linecopy);

    if (amount < 0)
	return 0;
    return amount;
}

    static int
find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
    int		lookfor;
    linenr_T	ourscope;
    int		ind_maxparen;
    int		ind_maxcomment;
{
    char_u	*look;
    pos_T	*theirscope;
    char_u	*mightbeif;
    int		elselevel;
    int		whilelevel;

    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
    {
	elselevel = 1;
	whilelevel = 0;
    }
    else
    {
	elselevel = 0;
	whilelevel = 1;
    }

    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;

    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
    {
	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;

	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
	if (cin_iselse(look)
		|| cin_isif(look)
		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
	{
	    /*
	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
	     * we must be out of scope...
	     */
	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
	    if (theirscope == NULL)
		break;

	    /*
	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
	     * out of luck too.
	     */
	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
		break;

	    /*
	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
	     * different scope...
	     */
	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
		continue;

	    /*
	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
	     * increment elselevel
	     */
	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
	    if (cin_iselse(look))
	    {
		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
		    ++elselevel;
		continue;
	    }

	    /*
	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
	     */
	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
	    {
		++whilelevel;
		continue;
	    }

	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
	    if (cin_isif(look))
	    {
		elselevel--;
		/*
		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
		 * get in the way.
		 */
		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
		    whilelevel = 0;
	    }

	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
	    if (cin_isdo(look))
		whilelevel--;

	    /*
	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
	     * this must be the if that we want!
	     * match the indent level of that if.
	     */
	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
	    {
		return OK;
	    }
	}
    }
    return FAIL;
}

# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
 */
    int
get_expr_indent()
{
    int		indent;
    pos_T	save_pos;
    colnr_T	save_curswant;
    int		save_set_curswant;
    int		save_State;
    int		use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr",
								   OPT_LOCAL);

    /* Save and restore cursor position and curswant, in case it was changed
     * via :normal commands */
    save_pos = curwin->w_cursor;
    save_curswant = curwin->w_curswant;
    save_set_curswant = curwin->w_set_curswant;
    set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
    if (use_sandbox)
	++sandbox;
    ++textlock;
    indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
    if (use_sandbox)
	--sandbox;
    --textlock;

    /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
     * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
     * command. */
    save_State = State;
    State = INSERT;
    curwin->w_cursor = save_pos;
    curwin->w_curswant = save_curswant;
    curwin->w_set_curswant = save_set_curswant;
    check_cursor();
    State = save_State;

    /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
    if (indent < 0)
	indent = get_indent();

    return indent;
}
# endif

#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */

#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)

static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));

    static int
lisp_match(p)
    char_u	*p;
{
    char_u	buf[LSIZE];
    int		len;
    char_u	*word = p_lispwords;

    while (*word != NUL)
    {
	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
	    return TRUE;
    }
    return FALSE;
}

/*
 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
 *
 * TODO:
 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
 */
    int
get_lisp_indent()
{
    pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
    int		amount;
    char_u	*that;
    colnr_T	col;
    colnr_T	firsttry;
    int		parencount, quotecount;
    int		vi_lisp;

    /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
    vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);

    realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;

    if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
    else
    {
	paren = *pos;
	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
	    pos = &paren;
    }
    if (pos != NULL)
    {
	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
	 * line that is at the same () level. */
	amount = -1;
	parencount = 0;

	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
	{
	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
		continue;
	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
	    {
		if (*that == ';')
		{
		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
			++that;
		    continue;
		}
		if (*that == '\\')
		{
		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
			++that;
		    continue;
		}
		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
		{
		    while (*++that && *that != '"')
		    {
			/* skipping escaped characters in the string */
			if (*that == '\\')
			{
			    if (*++that == NUL)
				break;
			    if (that[1] == NUL)
			    {
				++that;
				break;
			    }
			}
		    }
		}
		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
		    ++parencount;
		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
		    --parencount;
	    }
	    if (parencount == 0)
	    {
		amount = get_indent();
		break;
	    }
	}

	if (amount == -1)
	{
	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
	    col = pos->col;

	    that = ml_get_curline();

	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
		amount = 2;
	    else
	    {
		amount = 0;
		while (*that && col)
		{
		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
		    col--;
		}

		/*
		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
		 *
		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
		 */

		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
		    amount += 2;
		else
		{
		    that++;
		    amount++;
		    firsttry = amount;

		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
		    {
			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
			++that;
		    }

		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
		    {
			/* test *that != '(' to accommodate first let/do
			 * argument if it is more than one line */
			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
			    firsttry++;

			parencount = 0;
			quotecount = 0;

			if (vi_lisp
				|| (*that != '"'
				    && *that != '\''
				    && *that != '#'
				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
			{
			    while (*that
				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
					|| quotecount
					|| parencount)
				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
					    && !quotecount
					    && !parencount
					    && vi_lisp)))
			    {
				if (*that == '"')
				    quotecount = !quotecount;
				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
							       && !quotecount)
				    ++parencount;
				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
							       && !quotecount)
				    --parencount;
				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
							     (colnr_T)amount);
				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
							     (colnr_T)amount);
			    }
			}
			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
			{
			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
			    that++;
			}
			if (!*that || *that == ';')
			    amount = firsttry;
		    }
		}
	    }
	}
    }
    else
	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */

    curwin->w_cursor = realpos;

    return amount;
}
#endif /* FEAT_LISP */

    void
prepare_to_exit()
{
#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
    /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
     * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
     * problems. */
    signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
#endif

#ifdef FEAT_GUI
    if (gui.in_use)
    {
	gui.dying = TRUE;
	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
    }
    else
#endif
    {
	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);

	/*
	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
	 * screen (if there are two screens).
	 */
	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
#ifdef WIN3264
	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
#endif
	    stoptermcap();
	out_flush();
    }
}

/*
 * Preserve files and exit.
 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
 */
    void
preserve_exit()
{
    buf_T	*buf;

    prepare_to_exit();

    /* Setting this will prevent free() calls.  That avoids calling free()
     * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */
    really_exiting = TRUE;

    out_str(IObuff);
    screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
    out_flush();

    ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */

    for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
    {
	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
	{
	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
	    out_flush();
	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
	    break;
	}
    }

    ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */

    OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));

    getout(1);
}

/*
 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
 */
    int
vim_fexists(fname)
    char_u  *fname;
{
    struct stat st;

    if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
	return FALSE;
    return TRUE;
}

/*
 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
 * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
 * time, because it can be a system call.
 */

#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
# ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
#  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
# else
#  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
# endif
#endif

static int	breakcheck_count = 0;

    void
line_breakcheck()
{
    if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
    {
	breakcheck_count = 0;
	ui_breakcheck();
    }
}

/*
 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
 */
    void
fast_breakcheck()
{
    if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
    {
	breakcheck_count = 0;
	ui_breakcheck();
    }
}

/*
 * Invoke expand_wildcards() for one pattern.
 * Expand items like "%:h" before the expansion.
 * Returns OK or FAIL.
 */
    int
expand_wildcards_eval(pat, num_file, file, flags)
    char_u	 **pat;		/* pointer to input pattern */
    int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
    char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
    int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
{
    int		ret = FAIL;
    char_u	*eval_pat = NULL;
    char_u	*exp_pat = *pat;
    char_u      *ignored_msg;
    int		usedlen;

    if (*exp_pat == '%' || *exp_pat == '#' || *exp_pat == '<')
    {
	++emsg_off;
	eval_pat = eval_vars(exp_pat, exp_pat, &usedlen,
						    NULL, &ignored_msg, NULL);
	--emsg_off;
	if (eval_pat != NULL)
	    exp_pat = concat_str(eval_pat, exp_pat + usedlen);
    }

    if (exp_pat != NULL)
	ret = expand_wildcards(1, &exp_pat, num_file, file, flags);

    if (eval_pat != NULL)
    {
	vim_free(exp_pat);
	vim_free(eval_pat);
    }

    return ret;
}

/*
 * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
 * 'wildignore'.
 * Returns OK or FAIL.  When FAIL then "num_file" won't be set.
 */
    int
expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
    int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
    char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
    int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
    char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
    int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
{
    int		retval;
    int		i, j;
    char_u	*p;
    int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */

    retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);

    /* When keeping all matches, return here */
    if ((flags & EW_KEEPALL) || retval == FAIL)
	return retval;

#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
    /*
     * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
     */
    if (*p_wig)
    {
	char_u	*ffname;

	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
	{
	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
		break;
# ifdef VMS
	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
# endif
	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
	    {
		/* remove this matching file from the list */
		vim_free((*file)[i]);
		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
		--*num_file;
		--i;
	    }
	    vim_free(ffname);
	}
    }
#endif

    /*
     * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
     */
    if (*num_file > 1)
    {
	non_suf_match = 0;
	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
	{
	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
	    {
		/*
		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
		 * of the list.
		 */
		p = (*file)[i];
		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
	    }
	}
    }

    return retval;
}

/*
 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
 */
    int
match_suffix(fname)
    char_u	*fname;
{
    int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
    char_u	*setsuf;
#define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
    char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];

    fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
    setsuflen = 0;
    for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
    {
	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
	if (setsuflen == 0)
	{
	    char_u *tail = gettail(fname);

	    /* empty entry: match name without a '.' */
	    if (vim_strchr(tail, '.') == NULL)
	    {
		setsuflen = 1;
		break;
	    }
	}
	else
	{
	    if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
		    && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
						  (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
		break;
	    setsuflen = 0;
	}
    }
    return (setsuflen != 0);
}

#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)

# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
# endif

# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
/*
 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
 * it's shared between these systems.
 */
# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
#  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
# else
#  ifdef __BORLANDC__
#   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
#  endif
# endif

/*
 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
 */
    static int _cdecl
pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
    return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
}

# ifndef WIN3264
    static void
namelowcpy(
    char_u *d,
    char_u *s)
{
#  ifdef DJGPP
    if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
	while (*s)
	    *d++ = *s++;
    else
#  endif
	while (*s)
	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
    *d = NUL;
}
# endif

/*
 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
 * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
 * Return the number of matches found.
 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
 * at "path[wildoff]".
 * Return the number of matches found.
 * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync!
 */
    static int
dos_expandpath(
    garray_T	*gap,
    char_u	*path,
    int		wildoff,
    int		flags,		/* EW_* flags */
    int		didstar)	/* expanded "**" once already */
{
    char_u	*buf;
    char_u	*path_end;
    char_u	*p, *s, *e;
    int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
    char_u	*pat;
    regmatch_T	regmatch;
    int		starts_with_dot;
    int		matches;
    int		len;
    int		starstar = FALSE;
    static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
#ifdef WIN3264
    WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
    HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
    WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
# endif
#else
    struct ffblk	fb;
#endif
    char_u		*matchname;
    int			ok;

    /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
    if (stardepth > 0)
    {
	ui_breakcheck();
	if (got_int)
	    return 0;
    }

    /* make room for file name */
    buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
    if (buf == NULL)
	return 0;

    /*
     * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
     * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
     */
    p = buf;
    s = buf;
    e = NULL;
    path_end = path;
    while (*path_end != NUL)
    {
	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
	    *p++ = *path_end++;
	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
	{
	    if (e != NULL)
		break;
	    s = p + 1;
	}
	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
	    e = p;
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	if (has_mbyte)
	{
	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
	    p += len;
	    path_end += len;
	}
	else
#endif
	    *p++ = *path_end++;
    }
    e = p;
    *e = NUL;

    /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
    /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
     * component. */
    for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
	if (rem_backslash(p))
	{
	    STRMOVE(p, p + 1);
	    --e;
	    --s;
	}

    /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
    for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
	    starstar = TRUE;

    starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
    pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
    if (pat == NULL)
    {
	vim_free(buf);
	return 0;
    }

    /* compile the regexp into a program */
    if (flags & (EW_NOERROR | EW_NOTWILD))
	++emsg_silent;
    regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
    regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
    if (flags & (EW_NOERROR | EW_NOTWILD))
	--emsg_silent;
    vim_free(pat);

    if (regmatch.regprog == NULL && (flags & EW_NOTWILD) == 0)
    {
	vim_free(buf);
	return 0;
    }

    /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
    matchname = vim_strsave(s);

    /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
     * is following then find matches without any directory. */
    if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
							  && *path_end == '/')
    {
	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
	++stardepth;
	(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
	--stardepth;
    }

    /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
    STRCPY(s, "*.*");
#ifdef WIN3264
# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
    {
	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
	wn = enc_to_utf16(buf, NULL);
	if (wn != NULL)
	{
	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
	    {
		vim_free(wn);
		wn = NULL;
	    }
	}
    }

    if (wn == NULL)
# endif
	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
#else
    /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
#endif

    while (ok)
    {
#ifdef WIN3264
# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	if (wn != NULL)
	    p = utf16_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
	else
# endif
	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
#else
	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
#endif
	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
		&& (matchname == NULL
		  || (regmatch.regprog != NULL
				     && vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0))
		  || ((flags & EW_NOTWILD)
		     && fnamencmp(path + (s - buf), p, e - s) == 0)))
	{
#ifdef WIN3264
	    STRCPY(s, p);
#else
	    namelowcpy(s, p);
#endif
	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);

	    if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
	    {
		/* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
		 * find matches. */
		STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
		STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
		++stardepth;
		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
		--stardepth;
	    }

	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
	    {
		/* need to expand another component of the path */
		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
	    }
	    else
	    {
		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
		if (*path_end != 0)
		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
	    }
	}

#ifdef WIN3264
# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	if (wn != NULL)
	{
	    vim_free(p);
	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
	}
	else
# endif
	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
#else
	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
#endif

	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
	{
	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
#ifdef WIN3264
	    FindClose(hFind);
# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	    if (wn != NULL)
	    {
		vim_free(wn);
		wn = enc_to_utf16(buf, NULL);
		if (wn != NULL)
		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
	    }
	    if (wn == NULL)
# endif
		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
#else
	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
#endif
	    vim_free(matchname);
	    matchname = NULL;
	}
    }

#ifdef WIN3264
    FindClose(hFind);
# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
    vim_free(wn);
# endif
#endif
    vim_free(buf);
    vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
    vim_free(matchname);

    matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
    if (matches > 0)
	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
    return matches;
}

    int
mch_expandpath(
    garray_T	*gap,
    char_u	*path,
    int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
{
    return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE);
}
# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */

#if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \
	|| defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Unix style wildcard expansion code.
 * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac.
 */
static int	pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *));

    static int
pstrcmp(a, b)
    const void *a, *b;
{
    return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
}

/*
 * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
 * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
 * at "path + wildoff".
 * Return the number of matches found.
 * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync!
 */
    int
unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar)
    garray_T	*gap;
    char_u	*path;
    int		wildoff;
    int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
    int		didstar;	/* expanded "**" once already */
{
    char_u	*buf;
    char_u	*path_end;
    char_u	*p, *s, *e;
    int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
    char_u	*pat;
    regmatch_T	regmatch;
    int		starts_with_dot;
    int		matches;
    int		len;
    int		starstar = FALSE;
    static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */

    DIR		*dirp;
    struct dirent *dp;

    /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
    if (stardepth > 0)
    {
	ui_breakcheck();
	if (got_int)
	    return 0;
    }

    /* make room for file name */
    buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
    if (buf == NULL)
	return 0;

    /*
     * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard.
     * When EW_ICASE is set every letter is considered to be a wildcard.
     * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters.
     */
    p = buf;
    s = buf;
    e = NULL;
    path_end = path;
    while (*path_end != NUL)
    {
	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
	    *p++ = *path_end++;
	else if (*path_end == '/')
	{
	    if (e != NULL)
		break;
	    s = p + 1;
	}
	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
			 && (vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL
			     || (!p_fic && (flags & EW_ICASE)
					     && isalpha(PTR2CHAR(path_end)))))
	    e = p;
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
	if (has_mbyte)
	{
	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
	    p += len;
	    path_end += len;
	}
	else
#endif
	    *p++ = *path_end++;
    }
    e = p;
    *e = NUL;

    /* Now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e". */
    /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
     * component. */
    for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
	if (rem_backslash(p))
	{
	    STRMOVE(p, p + 1);
	    --e;
	    --s;
	}

    /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
    for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
	    starstar = TRUE;

    /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */
    starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
    pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
    if (pat == NULL)
    {
	vim_free(buf);
	return 0;
    }

    /* compile the regexp into a program */
    if (flags & EW_ICASE)
	regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* 'wildignorecase' set */
    else
	regmatch.rm_ic = p_fic;	/* ignore case when 'fileignorecase' is set */
    if (flags & (EW_NOERROR | EW_NOTWILD))
	++emsg_silent;
    regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
    if (flags & (EW_NOERROR | EW_NOTWILD))
	--emsg_silent;
    vim_free(pat);

    if (regmatch.regprog == NULL && (flags & EW_NOTWILD) == 0)
    {
	vim_free(buf);
	return 0;
    }

    /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
     * is following then find matches without any directory. */
    if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
							  && *path_end == '/')
    {
	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
	++stardepth;
	(void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
	--stardepth;
    }

    /* open the directory for scanning */
    *s = NUL;
    dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf);

    /* Find all matching entries */
    if (dirp != NULL)
    {
	for (;;)
	{
	    dp = readdir(dirp);
	    if (dp == NULL)
		break;
	    if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
		 && ((regmatch.regprog != NULL && vim_regexec(&regmatch,
					     (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0))
		   || ((flags & EW_NOTWILD)
		     && fnamencmp(path + (s - buf), dp->d_name, e - s) == 0)))
	    {
		STRCPY(s, dp->d_name);
		len = STRLEN(buf);

		if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
		{
		    /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
		     * find matches. */
		    STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
		    STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
		    ++stardepth;
		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
		    --stardepth;
		}

		STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
		if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */
		{
		    /* need to expand another component of the path */
		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
		}
		else
		{
		    /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
		    if (*path_end != NUL)
			backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
		    if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
		    {
#ifdef MACOS_CONVERT
			size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1;
			char_u *precomp_buf =
			    mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len);

			if (precomp_buf)
			{
			    mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len);
			    vim_free(precomp_buf);
			}
#endif
			addfile(gap, buf, flags);
		    }
		}
	    }
	}

	closedir(dirp);
    }

    vim_free(buf);
    vim_free(regmatch.regprog);

    matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
    if (matches > 0)
	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches,
						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
    return matches;
}
#endif

#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
static int find_previous_pathsep __ARGS((char_u *path, char_u **psep));
static int is_unique __ARGS((char_u *maybe_unique, garray_T *gap, int i));
static void expand_path_option __ARGS((char_u *curdir, garray_T	*gap));
static char_u *get_path_cutoff __ARGS((char_u *fname, garray_T *gap));
static void uniquefy_paths __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pattern));
static int expand_in_path __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u	*pattern, int flags));

/*
 * Moves "*psep" back to the previous path separator in "path".
 * Returns FAIL is "*psep" ends up at the beginning of "path".
 */
    static int
find_previous_pathsep(path, psep)
    char_u *path;
    char_u **psep;
{
    /* skip the current separator */
    if (*psep > path && vim_ispathsep(**psep))
	--*psep;

    /* find the previous separator */
    while (*psep > path)
    {
	if (vim_ispathsep(**psep))
	    return OK;
	mb_ptr_back(path, *psep);
    }

    return FAIL;
}

/*
 * Returns TRUE if "maybe_unique" is unique wrt other_paths in "gap".
 * "maybe_unique" is the end portion of "((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[i]".
 */
    static int
is_unique(maybe_unique, gap, i)
    char_u	*maybe_unique;
    garray_T	*gap;
    int		i;
{
    int	    j;
    int	    candidate_len;
    int	    other_path_len;
    char_u  **other_paths = (char_u **)gap->ga_data;
    char_u  *rival;

    for (j = 0; j < gap->ga_len; j++)
    {
	if (j == i)
	    continue;  /* don't compare it with itself */

	candidate_len = (int)STRLEN(maybe_unique);
	other_path_len = (int)STRLEN(other_paths[j]);
	if (other_path_len < candidate_len)
	    continue;  /* it's different when it's shorter */

	rival = other_paths[j] + other_path_len - candidate_len;
	if (fnamecmp(maybe_unique, rival) == 0
		&& (rival == other_paths[j] || vim_ispathsep(*(rival - 1))))
	    return FALSE;  /* match */
    }

    return TRUE;  /* no match found */
}

/*
 * Split the 'path' option into an array of strings in garray_T.  Relative
 * paths are expanded to their equivalent fullpath.  This includes the "."
 * (relative to current buffer directory) and empty path (relative to current
 * directory) notations.
 *
 * TODO: handle upward search (;) and path limiter (**N) notations by
 * expanding each into their equivalent path(s).
 */
    static void
expand_path_option(curdir, gap)
    char_u	*curdir;
    garray_T	*gap;
{
    char_u	*path_option = *curbuf->b_p_path == NUL
						  ? p_path : curbuf->b_p_path;
    char_u	*buf;
    char_u	*p;
    int		len;

    if ((buf = alloc((int)MAXPATHL)) == NULL)
	return;

    while (*path_option != NUL)
    {
	copy_option_part(&path_option, buf, MAXPATHL, " ,");

	if (buf[0] == '.' && (buf[1] == NUL || vim_ispathsep(buf[1])))
	{
	    /* Relative to current buffer:
	     * "/path/file" + "." -> "/path/"
	     * "/path/file"  + "./subdir" -> "/path/subdir" */
	    if (curbuf->b_ffname == NULL)
		continue;
	    p = gettail(curbuf->b_ffname);
	    len = (int)(p - curbuf->b_ffname);
	    if (len + (int)STRLEN(buf) >= MAXPATHL)
		continue;
	    if (buf[1] == NUL)
		buf[len] = NUL;
	    else
		STRMOVE(buf + len, buf + 2);
	    mch_memmove(buf, curbuf->b_ffname, len);
	    simplify_filename(buf);
	}
	else if (buf[0] == NUL)
	    /* relative to current directory */
	    STRCPY(buf, curdir);
	else if (path_with_url(buf))
	    /* URL can't be used here */
	    continue;
	else if (!mch_isFullName(buf))
	{
	    /* Expand relative path to their full path equivalent */
	    len = (int)STRLEN(curdir);
	    if (len + (int)STRLEN(buf) + 3 > MAXPATHL)
		continue;
	    STRMOVE(buf + len + 1, buf);
	    STRCPY(buf, curdir);
	    buf[len] = PATHSEP;
	    simplify_filename(buf);
	}

	if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
	    break;
	p = vim_strsave(buf);
	if (p == NULL)
	    break;
	((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
    }

    vim_free(buf);
}

/*
 * Returns a pointer to the file or directory name in "fname" that matches the
 * longest path in "ga"p, or NULL if there is no match. For example:
 *
 *    path: /foo/bar/baz
 *   fname: /foo/bar/baz/quux.txt
 * returns:		 ^this
 */
    static char_u *
get_path_cutoff(fname, gap)
    char_u *fname;
    garray_T *gap;
{
    int	    i;
    int	    maxlen = 0;
    char_u  **path_part = (char_u **)gap->ga_data;
    char_u  *cutoff = NULL;

    for (i = 0; i < gap->ga_len; i++)
    {
	int j = 0;

	while ((fname[j] == path_part[i][j]
# if defined(MSWIN) || defined(MSDOS)
		|| (vim_ispathsep(fname[j]) && vim_ispathsep(path_part[i][j]))
#endif
			     ) && fname[j] != NUL && path_part[i][j] != NUL)
	    j++;
	if (j > maxlen)
	{
	    maxlen = j;
	    cutoff = &fname[j];
	}
    }

    /* skip to the file or directory name */
    if (cutoff != NULL)
	while (vim_ispathsep(*cutoff))
	    mb_ptr_adv(cutoff);

    return cutoff;
}

/*
 * Sorts, removes duplicates and modifies all the fullpath names in "gap" so
 * that they are unique with respect to each other while conserving the part
 * that matches the pattern. Beware, this is at least O(n^2) wrt "gap->ga_len".
 */
    static void
uniquefy_paths(gap, pattern)
    garray_T	*gap;
    char_u	*pattern;
{
    int		i;
    int		len;
    char_u	**fnames = (char_u **)gap->ga_data;
    int		sort_again = FALSE;
    char_u	*pat;
    char_u      *file_pattern;
    char_u	*curdir;
    regmatch_T	regmatch;
    garray_T	path_ga;
    char_u	**in_curdir = NULL;
    char_u	*short_name;

    remove_duplicates(gap);
    ga_init2(&path_ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 1);

    /*
     * We need to prepend a '*' at the beginning of file_pattern so that the
     * regex matches anywhere in the path. FIXME: is this valid for all
     * possible patterns?
     */
    len = (int)STRLEN(pattern);
    file_pattern = alloc(len + 2);
    if (file_pattern == NULL)
	return;
    file_pattern[0] = '*';
    file_pattern[1] = NUL;
    STRCAT(file_pattern, pattern);
    pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(file_pattern, NULL, NULL, TRUE);
    vim_free(file_pattern);
    if (pat == NULL)
	return;

    regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* always ignore case */
    regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC + RE_STRING);
    vim_free(pat);
    if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
	return;

    if ((curdir = alloc((int)(MAXPATHL))) == NULL)
	goto theend;
    mch_dirname(curdir, MAXPATHL);
    expand_path_option(curdir, &path_ga);

    in_curdir = (char_u **)alloc_clear(gap->ga_len * sizeof(char_u *));
    if (in_curdir == NULL)
	goto theend;

    for (i = 0; i < gap->ga_len && !got_int; i++)
    {
	char_u	    *path = fnames[i];
	int	    is_in_curdir;
	char_u	    *dir_end = gettail_dir(path);
	char_u	    *pathsep_p;
	char_u	    *path_cutoff;

	len = (int)STRLEN(path);
	is_in_curdir = fnamencmp(curdir, path, dir_end - path) == 0
					     && curdir[dir_end - path] == NUL;
	if (is_in_curdir)
	    in_curdir[i] = vim_strsave(path);

	/* Shorten the filename while maintaining its uniqueness */
	path_cutoff = get_path_cutoff(path, &path_ga);

	/* we start at the end of the path */
	pathsep_p = path + len - 1;

	while (find_previous_pathsep(path, &pathsep_p))
	    if (vim_regexec(&regmatch, pathsep_p + 1, (colnr_T)0)
		    && is_unique(pathsep_p + 1, gap, i)
		    && path_cutoff != NULL && pathsep_p + 1 >= path_cutoff)
	    {
		sort_again = TRUE;
		mch_memmove(path, pathsep_p + 1, STRLEN(pathsep_p));
		break;
	    }

	if (mch_isFullName(path))
	{
	    /*
	     * Last resort: shorten relative to curdir if possible.
	     * 'possible' means:
	     * 1. It is under the current directory.
	     * 2. The result is actually shorter than the original.
	     *
	     *	    Before		  curdir	After
	     *	    /foo/bar/file.txt	  /foo/bar	./file.txt
	     *	    c:\foo\bar\file.txt   c:\foo\bar	.\file.txt
	     *	    /file.txt		  /		/file.txt
	     *	    c:\file.txt		  c:\		.\file.txt
	     */
	    short_name = shorten_fname(path, curdir);
	    if (short_name != NULL && short_name > path + 1
#if defined(MSWIN) || defined(MSDOS)
		    /* On windows,
		     *	    shorten_fname("c:\a\a.txt", "c:\a\b")
		     * returns "\a\a.txt", which is not really the short
		     * name, hence: */
		    && !vim_ispathsep(*short_name)
#endif
		)
	    {
		STRCPY(path, ".");
		add_pathsep(path);
		STRMOVE(path + STRLEN(path), short_name);
	    }
	}
	ui_breakcheck();
    }

    /* Shorten filenames in /in/current/directory/{filename} */
    for (i = 0; i < gap->ga_len && !got_int; i++)
    {
	char_u *rel_path;
	char_u *path = in_curdir[i];

	if (path == NULL)
	    continue;

	/* If the {filename} is not unique, change it to ./{filename}.
	 * Else reduce it to {filename} */
	short_name = shorten_fname(path, curdir);
	if (short_name == NULL)
	    short_name = path;
	if (is_unique(short_name, gap, i))
	{
	    STRCPY(fnames[i], short_name);
	    continue;
	}

	rel_path = alloc((int)(STRLEN(short_name) + STRLEN(PATHSEPSTR) + 2));
	if (rel_path == NULL)
	    goto theend;
	STRCPY(rel_path, ".");
	add_pathsep(rel_path);
	STRCAT(rel_path, short_name);

	vim_free(fnames[i]);
	fnames[i] = rel_path;
	sort_again = TRUE;
	ui_breakcheck();
    }

theend:
    vim_free(curdir);
    if (in_curdir != NULL)
    {
	for (i = 0; i < gap->ga_len; i++)
	    vim_free(in_curdir[i]);
	vim_free(in_curdir);
    }
    ga_clear_strings(&path_ga);
    vim_free(regmatch.regprog);

    if (sort_again)
	remove_duplicates(gap);
}

/*
 * Calls globpath() with 'path' values for the given pattern and stores the
 * result in "gap".
 * Returns the total number of matches.
 */
    static int
expand_in_path(gap, pattern, flags)
    garray_T	*gap;
    char_u	*pattern;
    int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
{
    char_u	*curdir;
    garray_T	path_ga;
    char_u	*files = NULL;
    char_u	*s;	/* start */
    char_u	*e;	/* end */
    char_u	*paths = NULL;

    if ((curdir = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL)) == NULL)
	return 0;
    mch_dirname(curdir, MAXPATHL);

    ga_init2(&path_ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 1);
    expand_path_option(curdir, &path_ga);
    vim_free(curdir);
    if (path_ga.ga_len == 0)
	return 0;

    paths = ga_concat_strings(&path_ga);
    ga_clear_strings(&path_ga);
    if (paths == NULL)
	return 0;

    files = globpath(paths, pattern, (flags & EW_ICASE) ? WILD_ICASE : 0);
    vim_free(paths);
    if (files == NULL)
	return 0;

    /* Copy each path in files into gap */
    s = e = files;
    while (*s != NUL)
    {
	while (*e != '\n' && *e != NUL)
	    e++;
	if (*e == NUL)
	{
	    addfile(gap, s, flags);
	    break;
	}
	else
	{
	    /* *e is '\n' */
	    *e = NUL;
	    addfile(gap, s, flags);
	    e++;
	    s = e;
	}
    }
    vim_free(files);

    return gap->ga_len;
}
#endif

#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
/*
 * Sort "gap" and remove duplicate entries.  "gap" is expected to contain a
 * list of file names in allocated memory.
 */
    void
remove_duplicates(gap)
    garray_T	*gap;
{
    int	    i;
    int	    j;
    char_u  **fnames = (char_u **)gap->ga_data;

    sort_strings(fnames, gap->ga_len);
    for (i = gap->ga_len - 1; i > 0; --i)
	if (fnamecmp(fnames[i - 1], fnames[i]) == 0)
	{
	    vim_free(fnames[i]);
	    for (j = i + 1; j < gap->ga_len; ++j)
		fnames[j - 1] = fnames[j];
	    --gap->ga_len;
	}
}
#endif

/*
 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
 *
 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
 *
 * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
 * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
 * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
 */
    int
gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
    int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
    char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
    int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
    char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
    int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
{
    int			i;
    garray_T		ga;
    char_u		*p;
    static int		recursive = FALSE;
    int			add_pat;
#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
    int			did_expand_in_path = FALSE;
#endif

    /*
     * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
     * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
     * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
     * return FAIL.
     */
    if (recursive)
#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
#else
	return FAIL;
#endif

#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
    /*
     * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
     * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
     * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
     * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
     */
    for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
    {
	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
# endif
	   )
	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
    }
#endif

    recursive = TRUE;

    /*
     * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
     */
    ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);

    for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
    {
	add_pat = -1;
	p = pat[i];

#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
	if (vim_backtick(p))
	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
	else
#endif
	{
	    /*
	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
	     */
	    if (vim_strchr(p, '$') != NULL || *p == '~')
	    {
		p = expand_env_save_opt(p, TRUE);
		if (p == NULL)
		    p = pat[i];
#ifdef UNIX
		/*
		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
		 * found file names and start all over again.
		 */
		else if (vim_strchr(p, '$') != NULL || *p == '~')
		{
		    vim_free(p);
		    ga_clear_strings(&ga);
		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
								       flags);
		    recursive = FALSE;
		    return i;
		}
#endif
	    }

	    /*
	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
	     * the pattern.
	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
	     */
	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
	    {
#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
		if ((flags & EW_PATH)
			&& !mch_isFullName(p)
			&& !(p[0] == '.'
			    && (vim_ispathsep(p[1])
				|| (p[1] == '.' && vim_ispathsep(p[2]))))
		   )
		{
		    /* :find completion where 'path' is used.
		     * Recursiveness is OK here. */
		    recursive = FALSE;
		    add_pat = expand_in_path(&ga, p, flags);
		    recursive = TRUE;
		    did_expand_in_path = TRUE;
		}
		else
#endif
		    add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
	    }
	}

	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
	{
	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);

#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
	    slash_to_colon(t);
#endif
	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
	     * "vim c:/" work. */
	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
	    vim_free(t);
	}

#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH)
	if (did_expand_in_path && ga.ga_len > 0 && (flags & EW_PATH))
	    uniquefy_paths(&ga, p);
#endif
	if (p != pat[i])
	    vim_free(p);
    }

    *num_file = ga.ga_len;
    *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";

    recursive = FALSE;

    return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
}

# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK

/*
 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
 */
    static int
vim_backtick(p)
    char_u	*p;
{
    return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
}

/*
 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
 * Returns number of file names found.
 */
    static int
expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
    garray_T	*gap;
    char_u	*pat;
    int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
{
    char_u	*p;
    char_u	*cmd;
    char_u	*buffer;
    int		cnt = 0;
    int		i;

    /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
    cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
    if (cmd == NULL)
	return 0;

#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
    if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p, TRUE);
    else
#endif
	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
				      (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
    vim_free(cmd);
    if (buffer == NULL)
	return 0;

    cmd = buffer;
    while (*cmd != NUL)
    {
	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
	p = cmd;
	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
	    ++p;
	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
	if (p > cmd)
	{
	    i = *p;
	    *p = NUL;
	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
	    *p = i;
	    ++cnt;
	}
	cmd = p;
	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
	    ++cmd;
    }

    vim_free(buffer);
    return cnt;
}
# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */

/*
 * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
 * EW_DIR	add directories
 * EW_FILE	add files
 * EW_EXEC	add executable files
 * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
 * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
 */
    void
addfile(gap, f, flags)
    garray_T	*gap;
    char_u	*f;	/* filename */
    int		flags;
{
    char_u	*p;
    int		isdir;

    /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
    if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
	return;

#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
    /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
    if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
	return;
#endif

    isdir = mch_isdir(f);
    if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
	return;

    /* If the file isn't executable, may not add it.  Do accept directories. */
    if (!isdir && (flags & EW_EXEC) && !mch_can_exe(f))
	return;

    /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
    if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
	return;

    p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
    if (p == NULL)
	return;

    STRCPY(p, f);
#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
    slash_adjust(p);
#endif
    /*
     * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
     */
#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
    if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
	add_pathsep(p);
#endif
    ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
}
#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */

#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)

#ifndef SEEK_SET
# define SEEK_SET 0
#endif
#ifndef SEEK_END
# define SEEK_END 2
#endif

/*
 * Get the stdout of an external command.
 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
 */
    char_u *
get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
    char_u	*cmd;
    char_u	*infile;	/* optional input file name */
    int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
{
    char_u	*tempname;
    char_u	*command;
    char_u	*buffer = NULL;
    int		len;
    int		i = 0;
    FILE	*fd;

    if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
	return NULL;

    /* get a name for the temp file */
    if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
    {
	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
	return NULL;
    }

    /* Add the redirection stuff */
    command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
    if (command == NULL)
	goto done;

    /*
     * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
     * Don't check timestamps here.
     */
    ++no_check_timestamps;
    call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
    --no_check_timestamps;

    vim_free(command);

    /*
     * read the names from the file into memory
     */
# ifdef VMS
    /* created temporary file is not always readable as binary */
    fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
# else
    fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
# endif

    if (fd == NULL)
    {
	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
	goto done;
    }

    fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
    len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
    fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);

    buffer = alloc(len + 1);
    if (buffer != NULL)
	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
    fclose(fd);
    mch_remove(tempname);
    if (buffer == NULL)
	goto done;
#ifdef VMS
    len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
#endif
    if (i != len)
    {
	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
	vim_free(buffer);
	buffer = NULL;
    }
    else
	buffer[len] = NUL;	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */

done:
    vim_free(tempname);
    return buffer;
}
#endif

/*
 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
 * functions.
 */
    void
FreeWild(count, files)
    int	    count;
    char_u  **files;
{
    if (count <= 0 || files == NULL)
	return;
#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
    /*
     * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
     * been used???
     */
    _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
#else
    while (count--)
	vim_free(files[count]);
    vim_free(files);
#endif
}

/*
 * Return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
 */
    int
goto_im()
{
    return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
}